Ricoh M022 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. M022
  6. Service manual
Ricoh M022 Service Manual

Ricoh M022 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for M022:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA
M022/M024/M026/M028

SERVICE MANUAL

DRAFT VERSION
Please subscribe to this Content ID number
for future updates to this document.
CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh M022

Summary of Contents for Ricoh M022

  • Page 1: Service Manual

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA M022/M024/M026/M028 SERVICE MANUAL DRAFT VERSION Please subscribe to this Content ID number for future updates to this document. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 2 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 3: Important Safety Notices

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Important Safety Notices Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer Customer Engineer Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine. Reference Material for Maintenance •...

  • Page 4: During Maintenance

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Power • Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source. •...

  • Page 5: Safety Devices

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA • Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces. Safety Devices • Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety devices immediately. • Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal injury.

  • Page 6: After Installation, Servicing

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Power Plug and Power Cord • Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source. A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.

  • Page 7: Special Safety Instructions For Toner

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA • Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance with company policy regarding the recycling or disposal of such items. Points to Confirm with Operators At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine. Emphasize the following points.

  • Page 8: Safety Instructions For This Machine

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Handling and Storing Toner • Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable. • Never store toner, developer, toner cartridges, or toner bottles (including empty toner bottles or cartridges) in a location where they will be exposed to high temperature or an open flame. •...
  • Page 9 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands. 7. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. 8.

  • Page 10: Laser Safety

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Laser Safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment.

  • Page 11: Symbols, Abbreviations And Trademarks

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Trademarks ®...

  • Page 12: Table Of Contents

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TABLE OF CONTENTS Important Safety Notices...........................1 Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer....................1 Before Installation, Maintenance........................1 During Maintenance............................2 After Installation, Servicing..........................4 Special Safety Instructions for Toner......................5 Safety Instructions for this Machine.......................6 Laser Safety..............................8 Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks......................9 Trademarks..............................9 1. Product Information Specifications..............................23 Machine Configuration............................24 Machine Configuration..........................24...
  • Page 13 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Installation Procedure..........................41 VM Card Installation...........................53 Enabling App2Me............................54 Security and Encryption Card........................55 Moving the Machine...........................63 Transporting the Machine...........................63 Paper Feed Unit (M368)..........................64 Component Check............................64 Installation Procedure..........................64 Paper Feed Unit (M367)..........................73 Component Check............................73 Installation Procedure..........................73 Side Tray (M369)............................81 Component Check............................81 Installation Procedure..........................81 1-Bin Tray Unit (M370)...........................86 Component Check............................86...
  • Page 14 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Gigabit Ethernet............................122 IC Card Reader............................123 Check All Connections..........................125 3. Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Tables............................127 PM Parts Settings............................128 Before Removing the Old PM Parts......................128 After installing the new PM parts......................129 Preparation before operation check......................129 Operation check............................129 4. Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand..............................131 Special Tools..............................132 Image Adjustment............................133...
  • Page 15 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Inner Right Lower Cover...........................160 Right Upper Cover............................162 Scanner Unit..............................163 Exposure Glass............................163 ARDF Exposure Glass..........................165 LED Board..............................167 Scanner Motor............................169 Sensor Board Unit (SBU)..........................171 LED-DB...............................172 Scanner HP Sensor............................173 Cover Sensor.............................174 Front Scanner Wire...........................175 Rear Scanner Wire............................181 Laser Optics..............................184 Caution Decal Location..........................184 Laser Unit..............................184 Ventilation fan............................190 Image Creation..............................192...
  • Page 16 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Transfer..............................219 PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit.......................219 PTR Contact Motor............................220 PTR Contact Sensor...........................223 Temperature and Humidity Sensor......................224 Drive Unit................................226 Gear Unit..............................226 Drum Motor: CMY............................231 Development Motor: CMY........................232 ITB Unit/ Drum: K/ Development: K Motor....................233 Development Clutch: K..........................234 Fusing/Paper Exit Motor..........................234 Motors with Bracket..........................235 Registration Motor.............................237...
  • Page 17 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Heating Roller Thermostat.........................263 Heating Roller Thermistor..........................263 Pressure Roller Thermistor.........................264 Pressure Roller Thermostat........................265 Thermopile..............................266 Fusing Front Fan............................267 Fusing Rear Fan............................268 Paper Feed..............................270 Separation Roller............................270 Paper Feed Unit............................270 Pick-up and Paper Feed Rollers.......................272 Registration Sensor............................273 Vertical Transport Sensor..........................274 Paper Lift Sensor............................275 Paper End Sensor............................276 Paper Feed Sensor............................277 Tray Lift Motor............................278...
  • Page 18 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA By-pass Pick-up Roller ..........................298 By-pass Feed and Separation Rollers......................299 HVPS: D..............................300 ARDF................................302 ARDF................................302 ARDF Rear Cover............................304 ARDF Front Cover and Original Tray......................304 Original Feed Unit.............................305 Pick-Up Roller............................306 Feed Roller..............................307 Friction Pad..............................308 ARDF Drive Board.............................308 Original Set Sensor and ARDF Top Cover Sensor.................309 Feed Motor..............................311 Feed Clutch..............................313 Transport Motor............................313...
  • Page 19 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Entrance Sensor............................335 Paper Exit Sensor............................335 Paper Sensor..............................337 Staple Tray Paper Sensor.........................337 Tray Lower Limit Sensor..........................338 Main Board..............................339 Electrical Components...........................341 Boards................................341 Controller Box Cover..........................342 Controller Box............................343 Controller Board............................348 HDD................................349 Controller Fan............................351 BCU................................352 NVRAM/EEPROM Replacement Procedure..................356 IPU................................357 PSU Box..............................358 PSU................................359 HVPS: T1T2 Board............................360 HVPS: CB Board............................361...
  • Page 20 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4............................447 SP4-XXX (Scanner)............................447 Main SP Tables-5............................463 SP5-XXX (Mode)............................463 Main SP Tables-6............................510 SP6-XXX (Peripherals)..........................510 Main SP Tables-7............................512 SP7-XXX (Data Log)..........................512 Main SP Tables-8............................540 SP8-XXX (Data Log2)..........................540 Main SP Tables-9............................585 Input Check Table.............................585 Output Check Table..........................591 Printer Service Mode..........................598 Scanner Service Mode..........................607 Test Pattern Printing............................608 Firmware Update............................611...
  • Page 21 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Address Book Upload/Download......................630 Information List............................630 Download..............................630 Upload...............................631 Using the Debug Log.............................632 Overview..............................632 Switching ON and Setting UP Save Debug Log..................632 Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD....................636 Recording Errors Manually........................636 Debug Log Codes.............................637 Card Save Function............................638 Overview..............................638 Procedure..............................638 Error Messages............................641 6.
  • Page 22 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Problem at Regular Intervals........................715 Blank Print..............................717 All-black Print.............................717 Missing CMY Color...........................718 Light Print..............................718 Repeated Spots or Lines on Prints......................718 Dark Vertical Line on Prints........................719 White Horizontal Lines or Bands......................720 Missing Parts of Images..........................720 Dirty Background............................720 Partial CMY Color Dots..........................721 Dark Irregular Streaks on Prints........................721 CMY Color Irregular Streaks........................721 Ghosting..............................721...
  • Page 23 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA INDEX ................................743 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 24 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 25: Product Information

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Product Information Specifications See "Appendices" for the following information: • Specifications • Supported Paper Sizes • Software Accessories • Optional Equipment CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 26: Machine Configuration

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Product Information Machine Configuration Machine Configuration Item Machine Code Remarks M022: C1a (Standard model), M024: M022/M024/ C1a (Finisher model), Main Unit M026/M028 M026: C1b (Standard model), M028: C1b (Finisher model) One-Tray Paper Feed Unit M367 Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit...

  • Page 27: Overview

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Overview Overview Component Layout CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 28: Paper Path

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Product Information 1. Toner Bottle [Y] 9. Paper Transfer roller 2. Toner Bottle [M] 10. PCU (Photo Conductor Unit) 3. Toner Bottle [C] 11. Development Unit 4. Toner Bottle [K] 12. Standard Paper Feed Tray (Tray 1) 5.
  • Page 29 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Overview [D]: ARDF [E]: Duplex Unit [F]: By-pass Tray Standard model (Full option) [A]: Standard Paper Feed Tray (Tray 1) [B]: Standard Paper Exit Tray [C]: 1 Bin Tray [D]: ARDF CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 30 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Product Information [E]: Side Tray [F]: Duplex Unit [G]: By-pass Tray [H]: One Tray Paper Feed Unit (Option) [I]: Two Tray Paper Feed Unit (Option) Finisher model (Basic) [A]: Standard Paper Feed Tray (Tray 1) [B]: Internal Finisher [C]: ARDF [D]: Duplex Unit [E]: By-pass Tray...
  • Page 31 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Overview Finisher model (Full option) [A]: Standard Paper Feed Tray (Tray 1) [B]: Internal Finisher [C]: ARDF [D]: Side Tray [E]: Duplex Unit [F]: By-pass Tray [G]: One Tray Paper Feed Unit (Option) [H]: Two Tray Paper Feed Unit (Option) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 32: Drive Layout

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Product Information Drive Layout 1. Scanner Motor: Drives the scanner unit. 2. Drum Motor: CMY: This controls the OPCs for cyan, magenta, and yellow. 3. Development Motor: CMY: This controls the color development units (cyan/ magenta/ yellow). 4.
  • Page 33 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Overview This controls the vertical transport roller. 8. Registration Motor: This controls the registration rollers. 9. Duplex/ By-pass Motor: This controls the duplex entrance, relay, exit, by-pass and separation rollers. 10. Fusing/ Paper Exit Motor: This controls the fusing unit and paper exit rollers. 11.
  • Page 34 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Product Information CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 35: Installation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Installation Requirements Environment 1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) 2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH 3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) 4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more 5.

  • Page 36: Machine Level

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Machine Level Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") Machine Space Requirements • This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is harmful to human health.

  • Page 37: Machine Dimensions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Installation Requirements Machine Dimensions [A]: 710 mm [B]: 580 mm [C]: 315 mm [D]: 120 mm [E]: 270 mm Power Requirements • Insert the plug firmly in the outlet. • Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord. •...
  • Page 38 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation • 120 to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A • 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 8 A 2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: NA: 108 V (120 V-10%) - 138 V (127 V+8.66 %) EU/AA: 198 V (220 V-10%) - 264 V (240 V+10 %) 3.

  • Page 39: Optional Unit Combinations

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Optional Unit Combinations Optional Unit Combinations Machine Options Options Remarks M022/M026 M024/M028 1-bin tray unit Side Tray Side Tray One-tray paper feed unit One-tray paper feed unit Two-tray paper feed unit Two-tray paper feed unit Fax unit...

  • Page 40: Fax Options

    I/F slot C SD card slot 2 (during Browser Unit Browser Unit installation only) Fax Options Options Remarks M022/M026 M024/M028 Fax Option Type C400 Fax Option Type C400 Memory Unit Type B 32MB Memory Unit Type B 32MB Other Options Options...

  • Page 41: Copier Installation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation Copier Installation Installation Flow Chart Basic model This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation. Finisher model This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 42: Accessory Check

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of these accessories. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 43: Installation Procedure

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation For M022/M026 Description Q’ty Power Supply Cord Decal - Paper Size SD card (VM/ App 2 Me) For M024/M028 Description Q’ty Power Supply Cord Decal - Paper Size Left tray SD card (VM/ App 2 Me) Installation Procedure Put the machine on the paper tray unit first if you install an optional paper feed unit at the same time.
  • Page 44 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Tapes, Retainers and Toner Bottles 1. Remove the tapes and the retainers on the machine. 2. Push the retainer [A] down, and then pull it to the left. 3. Remove all the tapes and retainers in the tray. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 45 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation 4. Open the ADF, and then remove all the retainers. 5. Open the front door [A]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 46 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 6. Remove the waste toner bottle [A]. 7. Remove the long screw. 8. Turn the lock lever [A] counterclockwise, and then open the drum securing plate [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 47 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation 9. Pull out the securing pin [A]. 10. Turn the ITB lock lever [A] counterclockwise. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 48: Sp2-Xxx (Drum)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 11. Pull out the sheet of paper [A]. 12. Turn the ITB lock lever [A] clockwise. 13. Close the drum securing plate ( x 1). 14. Attach the waste toner bottle. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 49 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation 15. Close the handles [A]. 16. Shake each toner bottle [A] five or six times. 17. Install each toner bottle [A] in the machine. 18. Close the front door. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 50 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 19. Connect the power cord to the machine. Paper Tray 1. Pull out the paper tray [A]. Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size. • To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully. Then push down the green lock at the rear inside the tray.
  • Page 51 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation 2. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays. • Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray. Keep these decals for use with these optional units. Left Tray Setting for M024 and M028 For the finisher versions of the machine (M024 and M028), set the left tray [A] in the internal finisher [B].
  • Page 52 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Settings Relevant to the Service Contract Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract. • You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance with the contract (SP5045-001).
  • Page 53 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation • Proxy User ID (SP5816-065) • Proxy Password (SP5816-066) 4. Get a Request Number Execute the @Remote Settings 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter [OK] with SP5816-202.
  • Page 54 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Communication error (proxy disabled) Check the network condition. Proxy error (Illegal user name or Check Proxy user name and password. password) Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this. Request number confirmation Processing…...

  • Page 55: Vm Card Installation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -2385 Other error -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service Two registrations for the same Check the registration condition -2391 mainframe of the mainframe Error Caused by...

  • Page 56: Enabling App2Me

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 2. Remove the SD slot cover [A] ( x 1). 3. Insert the VM SD card in slot 2 (lower). 4. Attach the SD slot cover [A] ( x 1). 5. Turn on the machine. Enabling App2Me The following procedure basically should be done by a customer.

  • Page 57: Security And Encryption Card

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation Security and Encryption Card The machine is shipped from the factory with the security and encryption card already in installed in slot 1 (the upper slot), but the data overwrite security unit and HDD encryption must be enabled before it can be used.
  • Page 58 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Installation To use HDD encryption, the user must enable encryption and print the encryption key. See Operating Instructions > Security Reference > 5. Securing Information Sent over the Network or Stored on Hard Disk > Encrypting Data on the Hard Disk •...
  • Page 59 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation The following table shows what to do in each case: For example, if only the controller and HDD were found to be defective, then it is case 4 in the table below. Encryption OFF: NVRAM SD Card Action Replace CTL/ HDD/ SDCARD / NVRAM...
  • Page 60 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Replace CTL Replace CTL/ SDCARD/ NVRAM Replace CTL/ SDCARD/ NVRAM Replace CTL/ SDCARD/ NVRAM Replace HDD Replace SDCARD/ NVRAM Replace SDCARD/ NVRAM Replace SDCARD/ NVRAM Encryption ON: NVRAM SD Card Action Replace CTL/ HDD/ SDCARD / NVRAM Replace CTL/ HDD/ SDCARD / NVRAM Replace CTL/ HDD/ SDCARD / NVRAM Replace CTL/ HDD...
  • Page 61 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation Replace SDCARD/NVRAM Replace SDCARD/NVRAM O: Not defective parts X: Defective parts, must replace (X): Not defective parts but must be replaced If the SD card is replaced, the NVRAM must be replaced. If the NVRAM is replaced, the SD card must be replaced. If the SD card and NVRAM are replaced, the HDD encryption unit and the Data Overwrite Security unit must both be re-installed after you complete the actions in the above table.
  • Page 62 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 3. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards. 4. Turn the SD-card label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 1 until you hear a click. 5. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected. 6.
  • Page 63 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, Dirty and blinks during overwritting This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be Clear overwritten. When reinstalling HDD Encryption Unit: Before You Begin the Procedure 1.
  • Page 64 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation [User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication Management"> "Available Settings" • "Available Settings" is not displayed until Step 2 is done. If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do the installation procedure.

  • Page 65: Moving The Machine

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copier Installation 10. Attach the SD card slot cover. The user must now enable encryption and print the new encryption key, as explained earlier in this section. Moving the Machine This section shows you how to manually move the machine. See the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.

  • Page 66: Paper Feed Unit (M368)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Paper Feed Unit (M368) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Screw (M3 x 6) Screw (M4 x 10) Spring washer screw Securing bracket Caster stand Stand cover Installation Procedure •...
  • Page 67 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed Unit (M368) For installing the paper feed unit (M368) only 1. Remove all tapes on the paper feed unit. 2. Remove the paper tray and remove all tapes and padding. 3. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit. •...
  • Page 68 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 5. Attach a screw (spring washer screw), using a securing bracket [A] to tighten the screw. 6. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1: M4 x 10 each). 7.
  • Page 69 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed Unit (M368) 8. Attach the stand covers [A] to the caster stands [B]. 9. Attach the caster stands [A]. 10. Load paper into the paper feed unit. 11. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 12.
  • Page 70 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 2. Replace the upper front cover [A] with another cover [B] (provided with the M367) ( x 1). 3. Lift the M367 [A] and install it on the M368 [B]. 4. Remove the paper tray [C] (for M367). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 71 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed Unit (M368) 5. Attach a screw (spring washer screw), using a securing bracket [A] to tighten the screw. 6. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1: M4 x 10 each). 7.
  • Page 72 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation • Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine. 9. Remove the paper tray [A] of the machine. 10. Attach a screw (spring washer screw), using a securing bracket [A] to tighten the screw. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 73 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed Unit (M368) 11. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1: M4 x 10 each). 12. Reinstall the paper tray. 13. Attach the stand covers [A] to the caster stands [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 74 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 14. Attach the caster stands [A]. 15. Load paper into the paper feed unit. 16. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 17. Adjust the registration for each tray ( p.133 "Image Adjustment"). •...

  • Page 75: Paper Feed Unit (M367)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed Unit (M367) Paper Feed Unit (M367) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Upper front cover Screw (M4 x 10) Spring washer screw Securing bracket Installation Procedure •...
  • Page 76 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation For installing the paper feed unit (M367) only 1. Remove all tapes on the paper feed unit. 2. Remove the paper tray and remove all tapes and padding. 3. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit. •...
  • Page 77 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed Unit (M367) 5. Attach a screw (spring washer screw), using a securing bracket [A] to tighten the screw. 6. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1: M4 x 10 each). 7.
  • Page 78 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 8. Load paper into the paper feed unit. 9. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 10. Adjust the registration for each tray ( p.133 "Image Adjustment"). • Use SP1002-003 11. Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality. For installing with the paper feed unit (M368) 1.
  • Page 79 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed Unit (M367) 5. Attach a screw (spring washer screw), using a securing bracket [A] to tighten the screw. 6. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1: M4 x 10 each). 7.
  • Page 80 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation • Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine. 9. Remove the paper tray [A] of the machine. 10. Attach a screw (spring washer screw), using a securing bracket [A] to tighten the screw. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 81 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed Unit (M367) 11. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1: M4 x 10 each). 12. Reinstall the paper tray. 13. Attach the stand covers [A] to the caster stands [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 82 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 14. Attach the caster stands [A]. 15. Load paper into the paper feed unit. 16. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 17. Adjust the registration for each tray ( p.133 "Image Adjustment"). •...

  • Page 83: Side Tray (M369)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Side Tray (M369) Side Tray (M369) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty Side Tray Paper Exit Unit Side Tray Inner Cover Screw: M4x8 Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 84 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 1. Remove the tape [A] on the side tray. 2. Open the duplex unit [A]. 3. Remove the right upper cover [A] ( x 2). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 85 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Side Tray (M369) 4. Right upper inner cover [A] ( x 1). 5. Attach the right upper inner cover [B] (provided with M369) ( x 1: removed in step 4). 6. Set the two hooks [A] into the holes [B] in the machine. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 86 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 7. Install the side tray paper exit unit [A] ( x 2). 8. Attach the two caps [B]. 9. Set the two tabs of the side tray [A] into the holes [B] in the machine. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 87 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Side Tray (M369) 10. Close the duplex unit [A]. 11. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 12. Check the side tray operation. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 88: 1-Bin Tray Unit (M370)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 1-Bin Tray Unit (M370) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Tray 1-Bin Tray Unit Bracket Bind Screw (M3 x 6) Screw (M3 x 8) Harness clamp CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 89: Installation Procedure

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1-Bin Tray Unit (M370) Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove all tapes. 2. Left rear cover [A] ( x 2) 3. Left cover [A] ( p.146) 4. Left upper cover [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 90 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 5. Attach the three harness clamps. 6. Inner rear left cover [A] ( x 1) 7. Operation panel arm cover [A] 8. Upper front cover cap [A] 9. Upper front cover [B] ( x 1) 10.
  • Page 91 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1-Bin Tray Unit (M370) 11. Inner right cover cap [A] 12. Inner right cover [A] ( x 3) 13. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 92 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 14. Inner rear right cover [A] ( x 1) 15. Attach the bracket [A] ( x 1: M3x8). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 93 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1-Bin Tray Unit (M370) 16. Set the shaft of the 1-bin tray unit [B] into the hole in the bracket [A]. 17. Install the 1-bin tray unit [A] ( x 2: screw [B]: removed in step 12, screw [C]:M3x8, x 1).
  • Page 94 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 18. Set the hook [A] of the 1-bin tray into the hole [B] in the machine. 19. Install the 1-bin tray [A] ( x 1: bind screw: M3x6, x 1, x 3). 20. Reassemble the machine. 21.

  • Page 95: Optional Counter Interface Unit (B870)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Optional Counter Interface Unit (B870) Optional Counter Interface Unit (B870) Installation Procedure 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Controller box cover ( p.342) 3. Release the harness [A] from the clamp. 4. Install the four studs [A] in the controller box. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 96 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 5. Install the key counter interface board [A] on the four studs. 6. Connect the harness [B] to the key counter interface board [A]. 7. Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board. 8.

  • Page 97: Copy Data Security Unit (B829)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Copy Data Security Unit (B829) Copy Data Security Unit (B829) Installation • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Controller box cover ( p.342) 3. Attach the ICIB-3 (copy data security board) [A] to CN 212 on the IPU ( x 2). 4.
  • Page 98 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation • The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB-3 removed and the "Data Security for Copying" feature set to "ON". • The machine will issue an uncertain SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the defective ICIB-3 and the "Data Security for Copying"...

  • Page 99: Tray Heater (Mainframe)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tray Heater (Mainframe) Tray Heater (Mainframe) Installation Procedure • This heater is supplied as a spare part. 1. Remove tray 1 from the machine. 2. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1). 3. Connect the connector [B] of the heater to the connector of the main machine. 4.

  • Page 100: Tray Heater (Optional Unit)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation Tray Heater (Optional Unit) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Tray heater Harness 1 Harness 2 Screw (M4 x 10) Clamp 1 Clamp 2 Installation Procedure •...
  • Page 101 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tray Heater (Optional Unit) • Check that harnesses are not damaged or pinched after installation. For Installing the Tray Heater in M367 1. Pull out the tray [A] in the optional paper tray. 2. Rear cover [A] ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 102 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 3. Left cover [A] ( x 2) 4. Pass the heater harness [A] through the square hole [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 103 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tray Heater (Optional Unit) 5. Install the tray heater [A] in the paper feed unit ( x 1). 6. Paper feed motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 2) 7. Connect the relay harness (harness 2) [A] to the heater harness [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 104 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation • Pass the relay harness (harness 2) [A] behind the drive board [C] as shown above. 8. Locate the relay harness (harness 2) [A] under the inner cover [B] as shown above. 9. Clamp the relay harness (harness 2) [A] ( x 2) •...
  • Page 105 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tray Heater (Optional Unit) 10. Attach the clamp 1 [A] and the clamp 2 [B]. 11. If you do not install M368, fold the relay harness (harness 2) [A], and then clamp it as shown above. Go to step 12 if you install M368 below M367. If not, go to step 13. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 106 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 12. Clamp the relay harness (harness 2) [A]. 13. Clamp the relay harness (harness 2) [A]. 14. Remove the rear lower cover of the machine ( x 3). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 107 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tray Heater (Optional Unit) 15. Remove the harness cover bracket [A] ( x 1) 16. Remove the connector [B] of the machine. 17. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [B] of the machine. 18. Reassemble the machine. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 108 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation For Installing the Tray Heater in M368 1. Pull out the trays [A] in the optional paper tray. 2. Rear cover [A] ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 109 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tray Heater (Optional Unit) 3. Pass the heater harness [A] through the square hole [B]. 4. Install the tray heater [A] in the paper feed unit ( x 1). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 110 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 5. Connect the relay harness (harness 1) [A] to the heater harness [B]. 6. Clamp the relay harness (harness 1) [A] ( x 3). 7. Remove the rear lower cover of the machine ( x 3). 8.
  • Page 111 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Tray Heater (Optional Unit) 9. Remove the harness cover bracket [A] of the machine. 10. Remove the connector [B] of the machine. 11. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [B] of the machine. 12. Make sure that the harness (harness 1) [A] is placed securely as shown above. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 112 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 13. Reassemble the machine. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 113: Controller Options

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Options Controller Options Overview This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slot applications. After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see “Check All Connections” at the end of this section).

  • Page 114: Sd Card Appli Move

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation • Slot 2 (lower) [D] is used for activating VM/ App 2 Me, installing the Browser Unit or for service procedures (for example, updating the firmware). USB Slots • Upper USB slot [E]: Used for connecting a USB2.0 interface cable •...

  • Page 115: Move Exec

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Options • Remove the SD card cover [A] ( x 2), and then keep the SD card in the places [B] after you copy the application program from one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons: 1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program.
  • Page 116 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. Undo Exec “Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).

  • Page 117: File Format Converter Type E

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Options File Format Converter Type E • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1. Remove the slot B cover [A] ( x 2). 2. Install the file format converter [A] into slot B and then fasten it with screws. 3.

  • Page 118: Ieee 802.11 A/G (Wireless Lan)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation SP No. Title Setting SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1" SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0" 5. Check the operation. 6. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of this section).
  • Page 119 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Options 2. Install the wireless LAN board [A] (Knob-screw x 2) into the I/F-slot. • Fasten the knob-screws firmly with a screwdriver. 3. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of this section).
  • Page 120 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation • "ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do not attach them at the wrong places. • Leave a space of at least 5mm at [D]. 7. Attach the clamps [A] as shown above. 8.
  • Page 121 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Options 4. Press “Wireless LAN”. Only the wireless LAN options show. 5. Communication Mode. Select either “802.11 Ad hoc”, or “Infrastructure”. 6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.) 7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. Range: Region A (mainly Europe and Asia) Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)

  • Page 122: Browser Unit Type E

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 5840-006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country. Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your 5840-007 Channel MIN country. Sets the transmission speed Auto, 54 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 5840-008 Transmission speed 18 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps,...
  • Page 123 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Options 1. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1). 2. Remove the SD-card (VM/ App 2 Me) from SD slot 2. 3. Turn the SD-card label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click.

  • Page 124: Gigabit Ethernet

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 17. Touch the "Browser" line. 18. Press the hard key that you want to use for the Browser Unit. As a default, this function is assigned to the "Other Functions" key (the bottom key of the function keys). 19.

  • Page 125: Ic Card Reader

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Options 4. Make a loop at both ends of the Ethernet interface cable 5 cm [A] from the end, and install the ferrite core. 5. Attach the port cap to the Gigabit Ethernet port [A]. 6. Check the operation of Gigabit Ethernet. IC Card Reader 1.
  • Page 126 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation 2. Attach the IC card reader [A]. 3. Release the hook, and then put the cable outside. 4. Route the cable [A] as shown above. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 127: Check All Connections

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Options 5. Remove the part [A] of the ARDF rear cover with nippers or a similar tool. 6. Reassemble the machine. Check All Connections 1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch. 2.
  • Page 128 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Installation CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 129: Preventive Maintenance

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Tables See "Appendices" for the following information: • Maintenance Tables CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 130: Pm Parts Settings

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Preventive Maintenance PM Parts Settings Before Removing the Old PM Parts 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004. 3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the PM counters automatically.

  • Page 131: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA PM Parts Settings • Waste Toner Bottle (if full or near full) After installing the new PM parts 1. Turn on the main power switch. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values. 3.
  • Page 132 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Preventive Maintenance CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 133: Replacement And Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand • Before installing options, please do the following: • If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user- programmed items, and the system parameter list. •...

  • Page 134: Special Tools

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Special Tools Part Number Description Q’ty B645 5010 SD Card B645 6705 PCMCIA Card Adapter B645 6820 USB Reader/Writer VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 Loop-back Connector – Parallel G021 9350 (Note1) C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope A257 9300 Grease Barrierta –...

  • Page 135: Image Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Adjustment Image Adjustment Scanning Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments. • Use C-4 test chart to do the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification A: Sub-scan magnification 1.

  • Page 136: Ardf

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration A: Leading Edge Registration 1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 0 ±...

  • Page 137: Registration

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Adjustment SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6-006-003 Leading Edge Registration ± 5.0 mm SP6-006-006 Buckle: Duplex 2nd ± 5 mm SP6-006-007 Rear Edge Erase (Trailing Edge) ± 5 mm ARDF sub-scan magnification 1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2.
  • Page 138 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Side to Side Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-002) to adjust the side- to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit and duplex unit. Adjustment Standard •...

  • Page 139: Erase Margin Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Adjustment Erase Margin Adjustment • Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan) cannot be adjusted within the standard values. Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D, and then adjust the erase margin A and B.

  • Page 140: Printer Gamma Correction

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 1. First do SP2-111-3. 2. Then do SP2-111-1. To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12. •...
  • Page 141 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Adjustment Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale ID max Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image density.) The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID, middle ID, Offset high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
  • Page 142 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the ID max: density of level 10 matches that (K, C, M, and Y) of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the Middle (Middle ID) density of level 6 matches that of...
  • Page 143 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Adjustment Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on Highlight (Low ID) (K) the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. - Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color - Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K)
  • Page 144 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on Highlight (Low ID) (K) the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. •...
  • Page 145 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Adjustment 6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image quality for these settings. 7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart. •...

  • Page 146: Exterior Covers

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Exterior Covers Toner Collection Bottle If you replace a bottle, then you must reset the PM counter for this unit. To do this, set SP 3902 020 to 1 before you start to work on the machine. 1.

  • Page 147: Front Door

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers 3. Attach the seals (provided with the new toner collection bottle) [A] to the five sponge pads. This closes the toner bottle. 4. Remove the toner collection bottle [B]. 5. Put the toner collection bottle [B] into the supplied plastic bag to prevent toner from leaking out of the bottle, and then seal the bag.

  • Page 148: Left Cover

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Front door [A] ( x 2, pin x 2) Left Cover 1. SD card cover [A] ( x 2) 2. Pull out the tray. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 149: Rear Lower Cover

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers 3. Left cover [A] ( x 2) Rear Lower Cover 1. Rear lower cover [A] ( x 3, hook x 1) Rear Cover 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 150: Dust Filter

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Rear cover [A] ( x 5, hooks) Dust Filter 1. Dust filter covers [A] 2. Dust filter [B] CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 151: Exhaust Filter

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers Exhaust Filter 1. Exhaust filters [A] Right Rear Cover 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Rear cover ( p.147) 3. Open the duplex unit. 4. Release the scanner right cover [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 152: Operation Panel

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Right rear cover [A] ( x 3) Operation Panel 1. Remove the two cover caps [A]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 153 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers 2. Operation panel arm cover [A] ( x 1) 3. Upper front cover [B] ( x 1) 4. Disconnect the USB cable [A] and the harness [B] ( x 2). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 154 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Operation panel [A] ( x 5) Key Tops 1. Operation panel ( p.150) 2. Operation panel arm holder [A] ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 155 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers 3. Operation panel rear cover [A] ( x 7) 4. Operation panel bracket [A] ( x 5, x 3) 5. Release the Key: main board [A] ( x 5) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 156: Touch Panel Position Adjustment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Key tops [A] (hooks) Touch Panel Position Adjustment • It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel at the following times: • When you replace the operation panel. • When you replace the controller board. •...

  • Page 157: Paper Exit Tray

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers 3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark . 4. Press the lower right mark when “ ” shows. 5. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished. 6.
  • Page 158 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Inner rear left cover [A] ( x 1) 4. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1) 5. Inner rear right cover [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 159: Inner Right Cover

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers 6. Paper exit tray [A] ( x 1) Inner Right Cover Basic model 1. Remove the two cover caps [A]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 160 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Operation panel arm cover [A] ( x 1) 3. Upper front cover [B] ( x 1) 4. Open the duplex unit. 5. Open the front door. 6. Remove the cover cap [A]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 161 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers 7. Inner right cover [A] ( x 3) Finisher model 1. Remove the two cover caps [A]. 2. Operation panel arm cover [A] ( x 1) 3. Upper front cover [B] ( x 1) 4. Open the duplex unit. 5.

  • Page 162: Inner Right Lower Cover

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Remove the cover cap [A]. 7. Open the cover [B]. 8. Inner right cover [A] ( x 4) Inner Right Lower Cover 1. Pull out the paper tray. 2. Toner collection bottle ( p.144) 3.
  • Page 163 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Exterior Covers 5. Right front lower cover [A] ( x 2) 6. Remove the long screw [A]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 164: Right Upper Cover

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Turn the lock lever [A] counterclockwise, and then open the drum securing plate [B]. • Make sure that the lock lever [A] is at home position when reassembling. 8. Inner right lower cover [A] ( x 2) Right Upper Cover 1.

  • Page 165: Scanner Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit Scanner Unit Exposure Glass 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Rear cover ( p.147) 3. Right upper cover ( p.162) 4. Upper front cover ( p.150 "Operation Panel") 5. Open the ARDF. 6. Scanner front cover [A] ( x 1, hooks) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 166 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2) 8. Rear scale [A] 9. Exposure glass [A] CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 167: Ardf Exposure Glass

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit ARDF Exposure Glass 1. ARDF ( p.302) 2. Scanner rear cover [A] ( x 1). 3. Exposure glass ( p.163) 4. Scanner left cover ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 168 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. ARDF exposure glass cover [A] ( x 2) 6. ARDF exposure glass [A] with bracket ( x 4). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 169: Led Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit • Position the blue marker [B] at the rear-right corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass [A]. LED Board • Do not touch the new LED board directly by hand. Grease spots will cause poor scanning quality. 1.
  • Page 170 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor clockwise, and then remove the screw at the front side. 6. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the left side by rotating the scanner motor counterclockwise, and then remove the screw at the rear side.

  • Page 171: Scanner Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit 7. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor clockwise. 8. LED board [A] ( x 1) Scanner Motor 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Rear cover ( p.147) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 172 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Disconnect the harness [A] and remove the spring [B]. 4. Scanner motor assembly [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1) 5. Scanner motor [A] ( x 2) • Do the scanner image adjustment after replacing the scanner motor (see "Image Adjustment") CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 173: Sensor Board Unit (Sbu)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit Sensor Board Unit (SBU) 1. Exposure glass ( p.163) 2. Bracket [A] ( x 5) 3. Sensor board unit [A] ( x 4, ground screw x 1, x 2) When reassembling Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit: •...

  • Page 174: Led-Db

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment LED-DB 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Rear cover ( p.147) 3. Release the three clamps. 4. LED-DB assembly [A] ( x 2, x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 175: Scanner Hp Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit 5. LED-DB [A] ( x 4) Scanner HP Sensor 1. ARDF ( p.302) 2. Scanner rear cover ( p.165 "ARDF Exposure Glass") 3. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [B] clockwise. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 176: Cover Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Remove the mylar [A]. 5. Release the three hooks. 6. Scanner HP sensor [A] ( x 1). Cover Sensor 1. ARDF ( p.302) 2. Scanner rear cover ( p.165 "ARDF Exposure Glass") CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 177: Front Scanner Wire

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit 3. Cover sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Front Scanner Wire 1. ARDF ( p.302) 2. Scanner front cover ( p.163 "Exposure Glass") 3. Scanner right cover ( p.163 "Exposure Glass") 4. Scanner left cover ( p.165 "ARDF Exposure Glass") CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 178 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Scanner front frame [A] ( x 5) 6. Front scanner wire holder [A] ( x 1) 7. Front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1) 8. Front scanner wire, white clip [C] and scanner drive pulley [D] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 179 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire 1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder. 2. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring) [C] through the notch.
  • Page 180 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft [A]. • Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time. 5. Insert the left end into the slit [B]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [C] and the rear track of the movable pulley [D].
  • Page 181 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit 6. Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [A]. The end should go via the front track of the right pulley [B] and the front track of the movable pulley [C]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 182 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Remove the tape from the drive pulley. 8. Insert a scanner-positioning pin [A] through the 2 nd carriage hole [B] and the left holes [C] in the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [D] through the 1 st carriage hole [E] and the right holes in the front rail [F].

  • Page 183: Rear Scanner Wire

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit Rear Scanner Wire 1. ARDF ( p.302) 2. Scanner rear cover ( p.165 "ARDF Exposure Glass") 3. Scanner front cover ( p.163 "Exposure Glass") 4. Scanner right cover ( p.163 "Exposure Glass") 5. Scanner left cover ( p.165 "ARDF Exposure Glass") 6.
  • Page 184 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. White pulley [A] ( x 1) 9. Follow steps 6 through 8 in the "Front Scanner Wire" Section. You can remove the rear scanner wire with the same manner for replacing the front scanner wire. Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire 1.
  • Page 185 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Unit • Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time. 5. Install the wire. • The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front.

  • Page 186: Laser Optics

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Laser Optics • Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury. Caution Decal Location Caution decal is attached as shown below. •...
  • Page 187 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Laser Optics • A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated in the manual).
  • Page 188 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Execute SP2-180-004 for clearing main scan start position adjustment setting. 7. Execute SP2-153-001 for clearing LD power. 8. Exit the SP mode. 9. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier. Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit If you did not do the procedure in "Before removing the old laser unit"...
  • Page 189 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Laser Optics 2. Ventilation fan base: rear [A] and ventilation fan base: front [B] ( x 2, x 1 each) 3. Left side stay [A] ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 190 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Disconnect the five harnesses and remove the two screws. 5. Pull out the laser unit [A] while holding the plate [B]. • Hold the harness [C] of the laser unit to one side when pulling out the laser unit. After installing a new laser unit Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser unit.
  • Page 191 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Laser Optics 1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 2. Check that the settings of SP2-119-001, -002 and -003 are "0". If these settings are not "0", execute "Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit" described above. •...

  • Page 192: Ventilation Fan

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment • SP2-102-002: Main Magnification for Black and Medium line speed • SP2-102-003: Main Magnification for Black and Low line speed • SP2-104-001 to -008: :LD Initial Power Adjustment for each color • The printed values [A] are different for each laser unit. •...
  • Page 193 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Laser Optics 3. Ventilation fan cover [A] ( x 2) 4. Ventilation fan [A] ( x 2) When installing the ventilation fan Make sure that the ventilation fan is installed with its decal facing the right side. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 194: Image Creation

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Image Creation PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit) • After developer initialization, the Vtcnt in the Z-C1a PCDU is different from in the Z-C1b. So, do not use a PCDU from a Z-C1b in a Z-C1a. Also, do not use a PCDU from a Z-C1a in a Z-C1b. •...
  • Page 195 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Creation • Make sure that the lock lever [A] is at home position when reassembling. 5. Turn the ITB lock lever [A] counterclockwise (this step is only needed if you remove the PCDU: K). 6. PCDU [A] When installing a new PCDU Remove the cover on the toner inlet and pull out the tape from the new development unit before installing a new PCDU in the machine.

  • Page 196: Pcu And Development Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment PCU and Development Unit The new PCU has front cover [A] and rear cover [B]. If you want to attach the old development unit to a new PCU, you must remove the rear cover from the new PCU first. 1.
  • Page 197 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Creation 5. Remove the gear [A] and the bearing [B]. 6. Rear cover [A] ( x 2) 7. Remove the screw at the front side. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 198 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. PCU [A] and development unit [B] • When the development unit is removed from the PCU, clean the entrance mylar [A] with a vacuum cleaner. When Reinstalling the PCDU 1. When you install a new C, M, or Y PCU, make sure that the white switch [A] is at the correct position for the color.

  • Page 199: Toner Supply Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Creation 2. When you install a new C, M, or Y PCU, attach the decal [A] to the front side of the PCU. 3. Reassemble the machine. 4. If you change the development unit, do the ACC procedure. 5.
  • Page 200 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Motor bracket [A] ( x 3, 4. Toner supply motor [A] ( x 2) • If the bushing (white) [B] is removed with the toner supply motor, install it in the toner hopper frame (as shown below).

  • Page 201: Toner Collection Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Creation • Make sure that the bushing (white) [A] is installed in the toner hopper frame [B]. Toner Collection Motor 1. Inner right lower cover ( p.160) 2. Sensor bracket ( p.220 "PTR Contact Motor") 3. Interlock switch bracket ( p.220 "PTR Contact Motor") 4.
  • Page 202 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Remove the two E-rings [A], the two gears [B], and the shaft [C]. 6. Toner collection motor [A] ( x 2) 7. Apply a small amount of "Silicone Grease G501" to the gear of the motor as shown above. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 203: Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Creation Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor 1. Left cover ( p.146) 2. Open the drum securing plate ( p.192 "PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)"). 3. Inner left front cover [A] ( x 1) 4. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 204: Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Waste toner bottle full sensor [A] (hooks) Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor 1. Left cover ( p.146) 2. Open the drum securing plate ( p.192 "PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)"). 3. Sensor bracket ( p.201 "Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor") 4.

  • Page 205: Rfid Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Creation 4. RFID CPU Board [A] ( x 1) RFID Board 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Controller box ( p.343) 3. RFID board [A] ( x 1, hooks) Toner Supply Fan 1. Left cover ( p.146) 2.
  • Page 206 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Toner supply fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) 5. Toner supply fan [A] ( x 2, x 1) When installing the toner supply fan Make sure that the toner supply fan is installed with its decal facing the right side. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 207: Image Transfer

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Transfer Image Transfer ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit If you replace the ITB unit, then you must reset the PM counter for this unit. To do this, set SP 3902 013 to 1 before you start to work on the machine. 1.
  • Page 208 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Open the duplex unit [A]. • If you open the duplex unit [A], this automatically releases the lock [B] for the ITB unit. 6. Unlock the ITB lock lever [A]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 209: Image Transfer Belt, Itb Cleaning Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Transfer 7. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the ITB unit fully [B]. 8. Grasp the handles [A], and then lift the ITB unit [B]. • If it takes much time to reinstall the ITB unit after removing it from the machine, close the paper transfer unit to prevent the drum units from being exposed to light.
  • Page 210 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. ITB unit cover [A] and the handles [B] (8 hooks). 3. Three stays [A] ( x 2 each) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 211 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Transfer 4. The left stay [A] ( x 4) 5. Rear holder bracket [A] ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 212 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. ITB cleaning unit [A] 7. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown above. 8. Remove a screw. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 213 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Transfer 9. Front holder bracket [A] 10. Remove a screw, and then turn the encoder sensor [A] to the left. • When replacing the image transfer belt, work carefully to avoid damaging the encoder sensor [A]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 214 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 11. The right stay [A] ( x 1) 12. Stand the ITB unit [A] as shown above. 13. Image transfer belt [B] When Installing the Image Transfer Belt • Reset the PM counter •...

  • Page 215: Itb Contact Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Transfer 1. Lubricate a part of the surface of the image transfer belt [A] with yellow toner, and then turn the image transfer belt to the position [B] as shown above. • Be sure to use yellow toner from the Z-C1; do not use lubricant powder, developer, or waste toner.

  • Page 216: Itb Contact Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. ITB contact motor unit [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) 4. ITB contact motor [A] ( x 2) 5. Apply a small amount of "Silicone Grease G501" to the gear of the motor as shown above. ITB Contact Sensor 1.
  • Page 217 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Transfer 3. Controller box ( p.343) 4. Toner supply bracket: K [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 1) 5. Release the toner tube: K [A] by pulling out its gear assembly a short distance ( x 1, x 1).

  • Page 218: Id Sensor Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Sensor holder [A] ( x 1, x 1) 7. ITB contact sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) ID Sensor Board 1. Fusing unit ( p.245) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 219 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Image Transfer 2. Remove the two screws. 3. ID sensor board bracket [A] ( x 1) 4. ID sensor board cover [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 220 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. ID sensor board [A] ( x 3) After installing a new ID sensor board Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor board. 1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine. 2.

  • Page 221: Paper Transfer

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Transfer Paper Transfer PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit • If you install a new PTR unit, then set SP 3902-018 to "1" before you start this procedure. • If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.

  • Page 222: Ptr Contact Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment When Installing the PTR Unit To install the PTR unit, pinch the two green locks [A] while you push the unit back into position. Do not insert objects between the metal plate [B] and its black plastic base. Otherwise, the plate could be bent, and this can cause poor image quality.
  • Page 223 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Transfer 3. Remove four screws. 4. Interlock switch bracket [A] ( x all) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 224 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Remove three screws. 6. Motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 225: Ptr Contact Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Transfer 7. PTR contact motor [A] ( x 2) 8. Apply a small amount of "Silicone Grease G501" to the gear of the motor as shown above. PTR Contact Sensor 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Motors with bracket ( p.235) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 226: Temperature And Humidity Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 4. PTR contact sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Temperature and Humidity Sensor 1. Inner right cover ( p.157) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 227 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Transfer 2. Temperature and humidity sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 228: Drive Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Drive Unit The drawing above shows the drive unit layout. 6. Paper feed motor 1. Scanner motor 7. Vertical transport motor 2. Drum motor: CMY 8. Registration motor 3. Development motor: CMY 9. Duplex/ By-pass motor 4.
  • Page 229 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 3. PCDU ( p.192)) 4. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 5. Rear cover ( p.147) 6. Right rear cover ( p.149) 7. Controller box ( p.343) 8. Fusing rear fan base [A] ( x 2, x 1) 9.
  • Page 230 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 11. Remove the five screws for stay [A]. 12. Stay [A] ( x 4, x 1) 13. Toner supply motor brackets [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 1 each) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 231 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 14. Release the three clamps and disconnect the four connectors. 15. Toner hopper unit ( x 7, 16. Remove the four clips for the toner supply tubes. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 232 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 17. Toner supply tubes [A] • Work carefully when removing the toner supply tube [A] to avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 233: Drum Motor: Cmy

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 18. Gear unit [A] ( x all, x all, x 6) Drum Motor: CMY 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 3. Right rear cover ( p.149) 4. Controller box ( p.343) 5.

  • Page 234: Development Motor: Cmy

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 9. Drum motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1) Development Motor: CMY 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Right rear cover ( p.149) 3. PSU box ( p.358) 4. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 1). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 235: Itb Unit/ Drum: K/ Development: K Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 5. Development motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1) ITB Unit/ Drum: K/ Development: K Motor 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Right rear cover ( p.149) 3. PSU box ( p.358) 4. Harness guide [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 236: Development Clutch: K

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. ITB unit/ Drum: K/ Development :K motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) Development Clutch: K 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Right rear cover ( p.149) 3. PSU box ( p.358) 4.

  • Page 237: Motors With Bracket

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 4. PSU box ( p.358) 5. Drive unit fan base ( p.226 "Gear Unit") 6. Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) Motors with Bracket 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Right rear cover ( p.149) 3.
  • Page 238 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Harness guide: white [A] ( x 1) 5. Remove all the connectors and clamps. 6. Harness guide: black [A] ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 239: Registration Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 7. Motors with bracket [A] ( x 4) Registration Motor 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. PSU box ( p.358) 3. Motors with bracket ( p.235) 4. Registration motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1) Duplex/ By-pass Motor 1.

  • Page 240: Paper Feed Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Duplex/ By-pass motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1) Paper Feed Motor 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. PSU box ( p.358) 3. Motors with bracket ( p.235) 4. Gear with bracket [A] ( x 1) 5.

  • Page 241: Vertical Transport Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 6. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1) Vertical Transport Motor 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. PSU box ( p.358) 3. Motors with bracket ( p.235) 4. Gear with bracket [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 242 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Bracket [A] ( x 4) 6. Remove the bracket [A] and the spring [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 243: Drum Phase Sensor: Cmy

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 7. Vertical transport motor [A] ( x 2) Drum Phase Sensor: CMY 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 3. Right rear cover ( p.149) 4. Controller box ( p.343) 5. Fusing rear fan base ( p.226 "Gear Unit") 6.

  • Page 244: Drum Phase Sensor: K

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 10. Drum phase sensor: CMY [A] ( x 1, hooks) Drum Phase Sensor: K 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 3. Right rear cover ( p.149) 4. Controller box ( p.343) 5.

  • Page 245: Inverter Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Drive Unit 10. Drum phase sensor: K [A] ( x 1, hooks) Inverter Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Inverter motor base [A] ( x 2, x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 246: Drive Unit Fan

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Inverter motor [A] ( x 2) Drive Unit Fan 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Drive unit fan base [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) 3. Drive unit fan [A] ( x 1, hooks) When installing the drive unit fan Make sure that the drive unit fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine.

  • Page 247: Fusing

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing Fusing Fusing Unit Maintenance Parts In the fusing unit, there are some maintenance parts. However, these parts are defined as yield parts. Refer to the following list to check the maintenance parts. Maintenance Parts Replacement Procedure Pressure Roller p.252 "Pressure Roller"...

  • Page 248: Cleaning Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Hold the fusing unit handles [A], and then pull out the fusing unit. When installing the fusing unit Make sure that the both lock levers are locked before closing the duplex unit. Otherwise, these lock levers can be broken.

  • Page 249: Oil Supply Roller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 3. Cleaning unit [A] ( x 4) Oil Supply Roller 1. Cleaning unit ( p.246) 2. Oil supply roller [A] CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 250: Cleaning Roller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment • Check the arrow [A] and install the oil supply roller [B] the correct way around. If not correct, the film on the oil supply roller will come off. Cleaning Roller 1. Cleaning unit ( p.246) 2.

  • Page 251: Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 2. Plain shaft bearing [A] Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 1. Fusing front cover ( p.246) 2. Fusing upper cover [A] ( x 4) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 252 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Fusing lower cover [A] ( x 3) 4. Cleaning unit ( p.246) 5. Pressure levers [A] ( x 1 each, spring x 1 each) 6. Release the fusing lamp harness [A] at the right side ( x 1, x 5).
  • Page 253 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 7. Release the fusing lamp harness [A] at the left side ( x 1). 8. Lamp holder [B] ( x 1) 9. Remove the fusing lamp holder [A] at the right side ( x 1). 10. Pressure roller fusing lamp [A] CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 254: Pressure Roller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Pressure Roller 1. Pressure roller fusing lamp ( p.249) 2. Right stay [A] ( x 3) 3. Thermostat holder [A] and thermistor bracket [B] ( x 4) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 255 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 4. Remove the C-rings, bearings [A], and gear [B]. 5. Pressure roller [C] When Reinstalling the Pressure Roller When replacing the pressure roller, you have to apply lubricant to the following places. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 256: Heating Roller Fusing Lamp

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment • Apply "Barrierta S552R" (0.15g to 0.25g) to the left end [A] and right end [B] of the pressure roller as shown above. Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 1. Fusing unit ( p.245) 2. Fusing lower cover ( p.249 "Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp") 3.
  • Page 257 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 5. Release the pins [A], and then remove the stripper plate [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 258 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Release the pins [A], and then remove the bracket [B] ( x 4). 7. Release the fusing lamp harness [A] at the left side ( x 1, x 4). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 259 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 8. Left stay [A] ( x 3) 9. Remove the screw. 10. Release the fusing lamp harnesses [A], and then remove the plate [B] ( x 2, x 2). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 260 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 11. Remove the fusing lamp holder [A] ( x 1). 12. Release the fusing lamp harness [A] at the right side ( x 1, x 5). 13. Right stay [A] ( x 3) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 261 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 14. Release the fusing lamp harnesses [A] ( x 2). 15. Lamp holder [A] ( x 1) 16. Heating roller fusing lamp [A] CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 262: Fusing Belt

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Fusing Belt If you replace a fusing belt, then you must reset the PM counter for this unit. To do this, set SP 3902 016 to 1 before you start to work on the machine. 1.

  • Page 263: Fusing, Heating And Tension Roller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 4. C-rings and bearings [A] 5. Remove the fusing belt [A] with rollers, lifting the shafts [B] up. 6. Fusing belt [A] Fusing, Heating and Tension Roller If you replace a fusing roller, then you must reset the PM counter for this unit. To do this, set SP 3902 015 to 1 before you start to work on the machine.
  • Page 264 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Fusing roller [A], heating roller [B] and tension roller [C] When Reinstalling the Fusing Roller When replacing the fusing roller, you have to apply lubricant to the following places. • Apply "Barrierta S552R" (0.1g to 0.2g) to the left end [A] and right end [B] of the fusing roller as shown above.

  • Page 265: Heating Roller Thermostat

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing Heating Roller Thermostat 1. Fusing front cover ( p.246 "Cleaning Unit") 2. Fusing upper cover ( p.249) 3. Remove the four screws. 4. Remove the plate [A], and then remove the heating roller thermostats [B]. • Do not re-use a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do this. Heating Roller Thermistor 1.

  • Page 266: Pressure Roller Thermistor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Fusing lower cover ( p.249) 4. Release the harness [A] ( x 2). 5. Heating roller thermistor [A] ( x 1, x 1) Pressure Roller Thermistor 1. Cleaning unit ( p.246) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 267: Pressure Roller Thermostat

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 2. Thermistor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1) 3. Pressure roller thermistor [A] ( x 1, x 1) Pressure Roller Thermostat 1. Fusing lower cover ( p.249) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 268: Thermopile

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Pressure roller thermostats [A] ( x 2) Thermopile 1. Paper exit unit ( p.281) 2. Thermopile base [A] ( x 2, x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 269: Fusing Front Fan

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 3. Thermopile cover [A] (hooks) 4. Thermopile [B] Fusing Front Fan 1. Inner right cover ( p.157) 2. Fusing front fan base [A] ( x 2, x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 270: Fusing Rear Fan

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Fusing front fan [A] ( x 1, hooks) When installing the fusing front fan Make sure that the fusing front fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine. Fusing Rear Fan 1.
  • Page 271 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Fusing 3. Fusing rear fan cover [A] (hooks) 4. Fusing rear cover [A] ( x 1) When installing the fusing rear fan Make sure that the fusing rear fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 272: Paper Feed

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Paper Feed Separation Roller 1. Pull out the paper tray. 2. Duplex unit ( p.289) 3. Open the guide plate [A]. 4. Separation roller [A] ( x 1). Paper Feed Unit 1. Pull out the paper tray. 2.
  • Page 273 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed 3. Guide plate [A] 4. Bracket [A] ( x 1) 5. Release the paper feed unit [A] ( x 2). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 274: Pick-Up And Paper Feed Rollers

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Paper feed unit [A] ( x 1) Pick-up and Paper Feed Rollers 1. Pull out the paper tray. 2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 275: Registration Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed 3. Pick-up roller [A] 4. Paper feed roller [B] Registration Sensor 1. Duplex unit ( p.289) 2. Registration roller guide [A] ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 276: Vertical Transport Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Bracket [A] ( x 2) 4. Registration sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Vertical Transport Sensor 1. Paper feed unit ( p.270) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 277: Paper Lift Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed 2. Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] ( x1, 3. Vertical transport sensor [A] (hooks) Paper Lift Sensor 1. Paper feed unit ( p.270) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 278: Paper End Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Paper lift sensor [A] ( x1, hooks) Paper End Sensor 1. Paper feed unit ( p.270) 2. Actuator [A] (tab x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 279: Paper Feed Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed 3. Paper end sensor [A] ( x1, hooks) Paper Feed Sensor 1. Paper feed unit ( p.270) 2. Release the harness [A] ( x 1). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 280: Tray Lift Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Paper feed sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 4. Paper feed sensor [A] ( x1, hooks) Tray Lift Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. PSU box ( p.358) 3. BCU bracket ( p.352 "BCU") CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 281: Paper Size Switch

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Feed 4. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 3) Paper Size Switch 1. Pull out the paper tray. 2. Paper size switch [A] ( x 1, hooks) Cleaning the Paper Dust Container 1. ITB unit ( p.205) 2.
  • Page 282 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Peel off the tape [A] and clean the paper dust container [B] with a vacuum cleaner. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 283: Paper Exit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Exit Paper Exit Paper Exit Unit Basic model 1. Fusing unit ( p.245) 2. Left cover ( p.146) 3. Left upper cover [A] ( x 1) 4. Inner rear left cover [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 284 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1) 6. Inner rear right cover [A] ( x 1) 7. Paper exit tray [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 285 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Exit 8. Paper exit unit holder [A] ( x 1) 9. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 1) Finisher model 1. Fusing unit ( p.245) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 286 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Paper exit unit holder [A] ( x 1) 3. Release the paper exit unit [A] 4. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 287: Paper Exit Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Exit Paper Exit Sensor Basic model only 1. Paper exit unit ( p.281) 2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, spring x 1) 3. Paper exit sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Paper Overflow Sensor Basic model only 1.

  • Page 288: Fusing Exit Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, spring x 1) 3. Paper overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Fusing Exit Sensor Basic model 1. Paper exit unit ( p.281) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 289 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Exit 2. Remove the screw for the fusing exit sensor [A]. 3. Fusing exit sensor [A] ( x 1) Finisher model 1. Paper exit unit ( p.281) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 290 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Fusing exit sensor [A] ( x 1, hook x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 291: Duplex Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Duplex Unit Duplex Unit Duplex Unit 1. Right rear cover ( p.149) 2. Right lower cover ( p.157) 3. Remove the screw and disconnect the two harnesses ( x 2). 4. Release the front and rear arms [A], [B] ( x 1 each).

  • Page 292: By-Pass Tray Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Remove the long clip [A]. 6. Slide the duplex unit [A] to the front, and then remove it. By-pass Tray Unit 1. Duplex unit ( p.289) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 293 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Duplex Unit 2. Release the duplex rear cover [A] ( x 4) 3. Duplex rear cover [A] ( x 2) 4. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 294: Duplex Entrance Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Remove the two clips. 6. By-pass tray unit [A] ( x 1) Duplex Entrance Sensor 1. Duplex unit ( p.289) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 295: Duplex Exit Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Duplex Unit 2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Duplex entrance sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Duplex Exit Sensor 1. Open the duplex unit. 2. Fusing unit ( p.245) 3. PTR unit ( p.219) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 296: Inverter Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Release the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1). 5. Duplex exit sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Inverter Sensor 1. Duplex unit ( p.289) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 297 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Duplex Unit 2. Guide plate [A] ( x 2) 3. Bracket [A] ( x 3) 4. Inverter sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 298: Fusing Entrance Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Fusing Entrance Sensor 1. Open the duplex unit. 2. Fusing unit ( p.245) 3. PTR unit ( p.219) 4. Sensor base [A] ( x 2) 5. Sensor cover [A] (hooks) 6. Fusing entrance sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks) By-Pass Paper Size Sensor 1.
  • Page 299 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Duplex Unit 2. By-pass tray cover [A] (hooks) 3. By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1) When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 300: By-Pass Paper End Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered). 2. Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the projection [C] of the left side fence bar.

  • Page 301: By-Pass Feed And Separation Rollers

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Duplex Unit 2. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook x 1). By-pass Feed and Separation Rollers 1. By-pass tray unit ( p.290) 2. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook x 1). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 302: Hvps: D

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. By-pass feed roller [A] (hook x 1) 4. By-pass separation roller [A] (hook x 1) HVPS: D • Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before removing the HVPS: D. 1.
  • Page 303 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Duplex Unit 5. HVPS: D [A] ( x 3, x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 304: Ardf

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment ARDF ARDF 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Rear cover ( p.147) 3. Controller box cover ( p.342) 4. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2). 5. Disconnect the ARDF cable [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1).
  • Page 305 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 6. Remove the left hinge [A] ( x 1). 7. Open the ARDF [A], and then remove it. When installing the Platen Sheet CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 306: Ardf Rear Cover

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment When setting the platen cover [A], it is necessary to have a 1 to 2 mm gap on the upper side and on the left side. ARDF Rear Cover 1. Open the ARDF left cover [A]. 2.

  • Page 307: Original Feed Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 3. Remove the snap ring [A]. 4. Remove the original tray [A], and release the rear shaft [B]. Original Feed Unit 1. Open the ARDF left cover ( p.304 "ARDF Rear Cover"). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 308: Pick-Up Roller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Original feed unit [A]. Pick-Up Roller 1. Original feed unit ( p.305) 2. Slide the shaft [A] (hook x 1). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 309: Feed Roller

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 3. Pick-up roller [A] Feed Roller 1. Original feed unit ( p.305) 2. Remove the clip [A]. 3. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pin [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 310: Friction Pad

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the feed roller [B]. Friction Pad 1. Original feed unit ( p.305) 2. Friction pad [A] (hooks) ARDF Drive Board 1. ARDF rear cover ( p.304) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 311: Original Set Sensor And Ardf Top Cover Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 2. ARDF drive board [A] ( x 2, all Original Set Sensor and ARDF Top Cover Sensor 1. ARDF rear cover ( p.304) 2. Release the six clamps and disconnect the four connectors. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 312 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the harness guide [A], and release the hooks [B] [C]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 313: Feed Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 5. ARDF top cover sensor [A] (hooks) 6. Original set sensor [B] (hooks) Feed Motor 1. ARDF rear cover ( p.304) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 314 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Remove the spring [A]. 3. Feed motor with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 315: Feed Clutch

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 4. Feed motor [A] ( x 2) Feed Clutch 1. ARDF rear cover ( p.304) 2. Harness guide ( p.309 "Original Set Sensor and ARDF Top Cover Sensor") 3. Slide the shaft [A], and then feed clutch [B] ( x 2, bushing x 1) Transport Motor 1.
  • Page 316 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Remove the spring [A]. 3. Disconnect the harness of the transport motor [A]. 4. Release the hook [B] of the harness guide. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 317: Registration Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 5. Transport motor with bracket [A] ( x 2) 6. Transport motor [A] ( x 2) Registration Sensor 1. Open the ARDF. 2. Bracket [A] (hook x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 318: Inverter Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Registration sensor holder [A] (hook x 1) 4. Registration sensor ( x 1, hooks) Inverter Sensor 1. Open the ARDF. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 319 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 2. Bracket [A] (hook x 2) 3. Inverter sensor holder [A] (hook x 2) 4. Inverter sensor ( x 1, hooks) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 320: Cooling Fan

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Cooling Fan 1. ARDF rear cover ( p.304) 2. Disconnect the four connectors. 3. Fan cover [A] (hook x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 321 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA ARDF 4. Cooling fan [A] (hook x 2) When installing the cooling fan Make sure that the cooling fan is installed with its decal facing the left of the machine. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 322: Internal Finisher

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Internal Finisher • This section is for the finisher models (M024 and M028). Internal Finisher 1. Inner right cover ( p.157) 2. Remove the knob [A], and then remove the bracket [B] ( x 1). 3.
  • Page 323 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher 4. Left upper cover [A] ( x 1) 5. Inner rear left cover [A] ( x 1) 6. Disconnect the harness [A] and remove the screw. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 324: Output Tray Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Internal finisher [A] Output Tray Unit 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Remove the cap [A]. 3. Output tray unit [B] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 325: Stapler Unit

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher Stapler Unit 1. Stapler unit with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2) 2. Stapler unit [A] ( x 2) Gathering Roller Motor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 326: Paper Exit Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Gathering roller motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) Paper Exit Motor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Paper exit motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 327: Shift Roller Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher 3. Paper exit motor [A] ( x 2) Shift Roller Motor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Paper exit motor ( p.324) 3. Shift roller motor bracket [A] ( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 328: Transport Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Shift roller motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) Transport Motor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Transport motor ( x 2, x 1) Tray Lift Motor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2.
  • Page 329 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher 3. Release the tray lift motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 4) 4. Remove the gear [A] and bushing [B] ( x 1). 5. Remove the gear [A] and shaft [B] ( x 1).

  • Page 330: Jogger Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Gear [A] ( x 1) 7. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 2) Jogger Motor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Output tray unit ( p.322) 3. Transport motor ( p.326) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 331 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher 4. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1). 5. Guide plate [A] ( x 1). 6. Jogger fence HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 332 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Remove the two screws. 8. Jogger motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2) 9. Jogger motor [A]( x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 333: Exit Guide Plate Motor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher Exit Guide Plate Motor 1. Inner right cover ( p.157) 2. Exit guide plate motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) 3. Exit guide plate motor [A] ( x 2) Shift Roller HP Sensor 1.

  • Page 334: Gathering Roller Hp Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Shift roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Gathering Roller HP Sensor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Gathering roller motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 335: Jogger Fence Hp Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher 3. Gathering roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Jogger Fence HP Sensor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Output tray unit ( p.322) 3. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 336 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Guide plate [A] ( x 1). 5. Jogger fence HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1). 6. Jogger fence HP sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hooks) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 337: Entrance Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher Entrance Sensor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Entrance sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) Paper Exit Sensor 1. Internal finisher ( Internal finisher) 2. Output tray unit ( Output tray unit) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 338 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1). 4. Guide plate [A] ( x 1) 5. Paper exit sensor [A] ( CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 339: Paper Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher Paper Sensor 1. Internal finisher ( Internal finisher) 2. Paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Paper sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Staple Tray Paper Sensor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 340: Tray Lower Limit Sensor

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Staple tray paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Staple tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks) Tray Lower Limit Sensor 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Output tray unit ( p.322) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 341: Main Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Internal Finisher 3. Tray lower limit sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks). Main Board 1. Internal finisher ( p.320) 2. Output tray unit ( p.322) 3. Main board [A] ( x 2, x all) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 342 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment When reinstalling the main board Check the DIP switch (SW100) [A] on the old main board. If the settings on the new main board are different from the old main board, change the settings on the new board (they must be the same as the settings on the old board).

  • Page 343: Electrical Components

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components Electrical Components Boards Rear Cover and Controller Cover Removal Controller Board CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 344: Controller Box Cover

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment Left Cover Removal HVPS: CB Board HVPS: T1T2 Board PSU Box Open Controller Box Cover 1. Rear cover ( p.147) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 345: Controller Box

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 2. Loosen two screws [A], and remove two screws [B]. 3. Slide the scanner cable bracket [C] in the direction of the blue arrow, and then remove it. 4. Loosen seven screws, and remove one screw. 5.
  • Page 346 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Fan cover [A] ( x 2) 4. Controller box cover ( p.342) 5. Release the ground cable and the bracket [A] ( x 2). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 347 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 6. SD card cover [A] ( x 1) 7. Disconnect all the harnesses ( x All). 8. Remove eight screws. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 348 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 9. Open the controller box [A]. Removing the controller box 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 3. Fan cover [A] ( x 2) 4. Controller box cover ( p.342) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 349 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 5. Release the ground cable and the bracket [A] ( x 2). 6. Disconnect all the harnesses ( x All). 7. Remove eight screws. 8. Bracket [A] ( x 1) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 350: Controller Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 9. Remove the controller box. Controller Board 1. Rear cover ( p.147) 2. Controller box cover ( p.342) 3. Fan cover ( p.343 "Controller Box") 4. HDD assembly ( p.349 "HDD") 5. Controller box bracket [A] ( x 5) 6.

  • Page 351: Hdd

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 7. Remove the Interface rails [A], NVRAM [B] and RAM-DIMMs [C]. When installing the new controller board 1. Remove the NVRAM and RAM DIMMs from the old controller board. 2. Install the NVRAM and RAM DIMMs on the new controller board after you replace the controller board.
  • Page 352 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Controller box cover ( p.342) 4. HDD assembly [A] ( x 4, x 2) 5. HDD [A] ( x 4) 6. Disconnect the HDD harnesses [A]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 353: Controller Fan

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components When installing a new HDD unit 1. Turn the main power switch on. The disk is automatically formatted. 2. Install the stamp data using "SP5853". 3. Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use. Disposal of HDD Units •...

  • Page 354: Bcu

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Controller fan base ( x 2, x 1) 4. Controller fan [A] ( x 2, x 1) When installing the controller fan Make sure that the controller fan is installed with its decal facing the upper side. 1.
  • Page 355 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 3. Release the six connectors and disconnect all the harnesses. 4. BCU [A] ( x 7) • Make sure the EEPROM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the EEPROM in the EEPROM slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the downward side. When installing the new BCU 1.
  • Page 356 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment • Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you replace the EEPROM. • Keep EEPROM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage EEPROM data.
  • Page 357 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 4. BCU with bracket [A] ( x 4) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 358: Nvram/Eeprom Replacement Procedure

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment NVRAM/EEPROM Replacement Procedure SMC Report Make sure the SMC report [A] is stored as shown above. EEPROM on the BCU 1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine. 2.

  • Page 359: Ipu

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 16. Do ACC for the printer application program. NVRAM on the Controller 1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine. 2. Output the SMC data (SP5-990-001) if possible. 3.

  • Page 360: Psu Box

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment PSU Box Opening the PSU box 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Connector bracket [A] ( x 2) 3. Open the PSU box [A] ( x 5, x All, x All). Removing the PSU box 1.

  • Page 361: Psu

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 2. Bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. PSU box [A] ( x 5, x All, x All) 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) 2. Connector bracket ( p.358) 3. Disconnect all the harnesses ( x All). CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 362: Hvps: T1T2 Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. SDB holder [A] ( x 2) 5. PSU board [A] ( x 10, x all) HVPS: T1T2 Board 1. Left cover ( p.146) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 363: Hvps: Cb Board

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 2. HVPS: T1T2 board [A] ( x 6, x 6, x 2) HVPS: CB Board 1. Left cover ( p.146) 2. Toner collection bottle ( p.144) 3. Remove the connector cover [A], and then disconnect the connector [B]. CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 364: Sdb

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Board bracket [A] ( x 3, x 5, x 2) 5. HVPS: CB board [A] ( x 6, All 1. Rear lower cover ( p.147) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 365 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Components 2. SDB [A] ( x 4, x 2) CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 366 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 4. Replacement and Adjustment CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 367: System Maintenance

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Service Program Mode • Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data. SP Tables See "Appendices"...

  • Page 368: Selecting The Program Number

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions of the System/ Printer/Scanner SP modes.

  • Page 369: Exiting Service Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Service Program Mode 2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust. 3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that you want to open.

  • Page 370: Remarks

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance • The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON. Remarks Display on the Control Panel Screen The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated.
  • Page 371 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Service Program Mode Others The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables. FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.) DFU: Design/Factory Use only Do not touch these SP modes in the field.

  • Page 372: Main Sp Tables-1

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-1 SP1-XXX (Feed) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing 1001 for each mode.
  • Page 373 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 018 Duplex: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 9 / -0.1 / 0.1 mm/step] 019 Duplex:Thick1 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -2.1 / 0.1 mm/step] 020 Duplex: Thick2 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -3 / 0.1 mm/step] 021 Duplex:Plain:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.7 / 0.1 mm/step]...
  • Page 374 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 004 Paper Tray2/3/4:Plain *ENG [-11 to 9 / -1 / 1 mm/step] 005 Paper Tray2/3/4:Middle Thick *ENG [-11 to 9 / -1 / 1 mm/step] 006 Paper Tray2/3/4:Thick1 *ENG [-11 to 9 / -3 / 1 mm/step] 007 By-pass:Plain *ENG [-11 to 9 / -1 / 1 mm/step]...
  • Page 375 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 1103 [Fusing Idling] Fusing Idling Adjustment [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 012 Forced Idling Stop *ENG 0: OFF, 1; ON 013 Forced Idling Stop Temp. *ENG [100 to 180 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 014 Minimum Idling Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 2 / 1 sec/step]...
  • Page 376 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 009 P.Feed Temp:MThick:P-Roll:FC *ENG [0 to 160 / 100/ 1 deg/step] 010 Upper Limit Temp *ENG [0 to 100 / 25/ 1 deg/step] 011 Offset: Feed Start *ENG [0 to 100 / 20/ 1 deg/step] 012 Offset: Feed Start: M-Thick *ENG [0 to 100 / 10/ 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 377 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 Panel Off Mode: Center * ENG [50 to 180 / 140 / 1 deg /step] Specifies the heating roller temperature (center) in the panel off mode. Panel Off Mode: Ends * ENG [50 to 180 / 140 / 1 deg /step] Specifies the heating roller temperature (both ends) in the panel off mode.
  • Page 378 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 038 Thin: FC: Simplex:Center *ENG 039 Thin: FC: Simplex: Ends *ENG 040 Thin:FC:Duplex:Center *ENG 041 Thin:FC:Duplex:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg /step] 042 Thin: BW: Simplex:Center *ENG 043 Thin: BW: Simplex: Ends *ENG 044 Thin: BW: Duplex:Center *ENG...
  • Page 379 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 058 SP 1:FC:Simplex:Center *ENG 059 SP 1:FC:Simplex:Ends *ENG 060 SP 1:FC:Duplex:Center *ENG 061 SP 1:FC:Duplex:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 170 / 1 deg/step] 062 SP 1:BW:Simplex:Center *ENG 063 SP 1:BW:Simplex:Ends *ENG 064 SP 1:BW:Duplex:Center *ENG 065 SP 1: BW: Duplex: Ends *ENG...
  • Page 380 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Target Temp. After Ready *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the target temperature for the maintain mode after the machine has reached the target temperature in warm-up mode. Recovery Target Temp. *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg /step] Specifies the target temperature for the print mode without printing job after the machine's...
  • Page 381 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 120 Plain2: FC: Simplex:Center *ENG 121 Plain2: FC: Simplex:Ends *ENG 122 Plain2: FC: Duplex:Center *ENG 123 Plain2: FC: Duplex:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step] 124 Plain2: BW: Simplex:Center *ENG 125 Plain2: BW: Simplex: Ends *ENG 126 Plain2: BW: Duplex:Center *ENG...
  • Page 382 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 144 Glossy: Plain2:Center *ENG 145 Glossy: Plain2: Ends *ENG 146 Glossy: MThick:Center *ENG 147 Glossy: MThick: Ends *ENG 160 F: Thick1:FC:Simplex:Center *ENG 161 F: Thick1:FC:Simplex:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 135 / 1 deg/step] 162 F: Thick1:BW:Simplex:Center *ENG 163 F: Thick1:BW:Simplex:Ends...
  • Page 383 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 211 Plain2:Simplex:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 125 / 1 deg/step] 212 F: Plain1:Simplex:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 105 / 1 deg/step] 213 F: Plain2:Simplex:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 110 / 1 deg/step] 214 F: MThick:Simplex: Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 115 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 384 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 233 F: MThick:Duplex: Press *ENG 234 Glossy: Plain1: Duplex: Press *ENG 235 Glossy: Plain2: Duplex: Press *ENG 236 Glossy: MThick: Duplex: Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 90 / 1 deg/step] 237 F: Thick1:Duplex: Press *ENG 238 F: SP 1:Duplex: Press *ENG...
  • Page 385 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 Pre-Idling Time *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001. Stop Time * ENG [5 to 30 / 20 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the time for measuring the nip. 1112 [Environment Correction: Fusing] Temp.: Threshold: Low...
  • Page 386 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance P-Roll Thresh AF Ready *ENG [0 to 160 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for entering the wait time mode (SP1-113-001). P-Roll Thresh AF Job *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for entering the wait time mode (SP1-113-004).
  • Page 387 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 Center Temp. 2 [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller (center) when the paper width is 226 mm or more. The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116-019. Ends Temp.
  • Page 388 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance After Job End [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the idling time without the lamp on after job end. This idling prevents the heating roller overheating after job end. 1118 [Curl Correction] Execute Pattern *ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 389 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-1 Feed Condition *ENG [0 or 2 / 0 / 1] Selects the paper feed timing. 0: Productivity priority, 1: Fusing quality priory Note: When the print paper size changes from a small to a large size, you can stop the print job in order to ensure that the fusing temperature is high enough, and then resume it when the proper temperature has been reached.
  • Page 390 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [0 or 1 / 1/ -] Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on or 003 Auto Execute *ENG off. 0: Off, 1: On [Fan Cool Timeset] 1950 Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end. 001 Development Fan1 *ENG 002 Development Fan2...

  • Page 391: Main Sp Tables-2

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 Main SP Tables-2 SP2-XXX (Drum) 2013 [Environmental Correction:PCU] Displays the environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity. [1 to 5 / – / 1 /step] 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m 001 Current Environmental: Display *ENG 2: ML (4.3 <...
  • Page 392 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Displays the current temperature. 007 Current Temp.: Display *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step] Displays the current relative humidity. 008 Current Relative Humidity: Display *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step] Displays the absolute humidity.
  • Page 393 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 001 Main Dot: Bk *ENG 002 Main Dot: C *ENG [–511 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 003 Main Dot: M *ENG 004 Main Dot: Y *ENG 005 Sub Line: Bk *ENG 006 Sub Line: C *ENG [–800 to 800 / 0 / 1 line/step] 007 Sub Line: M...
  • Page 394 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [Test Pattern] 2109 Generates the test pattern. Pattern Selection [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step] 0 None 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 13. Independent Pattern (4dot) 2: Vertical Line (2dot) 14.
  • Page 395 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 Executes the rough line position adjustment once. After doing this SP, make sure to execute 003 Mode c SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line position adjustment is not perfectly done. 004 Mode d Rough adjustment and fine adjustment, once each. [Skew Adjustment] 2117 Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.
  • Page 396 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 PWM: Bk *ENG 002 PWM: C *ENG 003 PWM: M *ENG 004 PWM: Y *ENG [0 to 1024 / 0 / 1/step] 005 PWM: Front *ENG 006 PWM: Center *ENG 007 PWM: Rear *ENG [ID Sensor Check Result] Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check.
  • Page 397 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 001 Maximum: Bk *ENG 002 Maximum: C *ENG 003 Maximum: M *ENG 004 Maximum: Y *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 005 Maximum: Front *ENG 006 Maximum: Center *ENG 007 Maximum: Rear *ENG [ID Sensor Check Result] Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check.
  • Page 398 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Maximum 2: Bk *ENG 002 Maximum 2: C *ENG 003 Maximum 2: M *ENG 004 Maximum 2: Y *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 005 Maximum 2: Front *ENG 006 Maximum 2: Center *ENG 007 Maximum 2: Rear *ENG...
  • Page 399 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 029 Area 2: Bk: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / -193 / 1sub-dot/step] 030 Area 3: Bk: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 58 / 1sub-dot/step] 031 Area 4: Bk: LD1 *ENG 032 Area 5: Bk: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 143 / 1sub-dot/step] 033 Area 6: Bk: LD1...
  • Page 400 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 081 Area 2: C: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / -195 / 1sub-dot/step] 082 Area 3: C: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 56 / 1sub-dot/step] 083 Area 4: C: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 57 / 1sub-dot/step] 084 Area 5: C: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 143 / 1sub-dot/step]...
  • Page 401 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 133 Area 2: M: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / -192 / 1sub-dot/step] 134 Area 3: M: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 60 / 1sub-dot/step] 135 Area 4: M: LD1 *ENG 136 Area 5: M: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 142 / 1sub-dot/step] 137 Area 6: M: LD1...
  • Page 402 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 185 Area 2: Y: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / -194 / 1sub-dot/step] 186 Area 3: Y: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 60 / 1sub-dot/step] 187 Area 4: Y: LD1 *ENG 188 Area 5: Y: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 144 / 1sub-dot/step] 189 Area 6: Y: LD1...
  • Page 403 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 001 Color Regist. 002 Mag Adjust 003 MUSIC Result 004 Area Mag. Correction 2153 [Shade: SP Clear] 001 SP Clear Execute *ENG Clears "Shading Correct Setting" (SP2152) 2194 [MUSIC Execution Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result 001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step]...
  • Page 404 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [Skew Origin Set] 2220 Resets the value of the skew adjustment motor for each color. These SPs must be executed when a new laser optics housing unit is installed. 001 C:Skew Motor *ENG 002 M:Skew Motor *ENG 003 Y:Skew Motor *ENG...
  • Page 405 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 001 Separation DC: Standard-Spd: 1st *ENG 002 Separation DC: Standard-Spd: 2nd *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V/step] 003 Separation DC: Low-Spd: 1st *ENG 004 Separation DC: Low-Spd: 2nd *ENG [Plain1: Bias: BW] 2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain 1 paper in black-and-white mode.
  • Page 406 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Separation DC: Standard Spd: 1st *ENG 002 Separation DC: Standard Spd: 2nd *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V/step] 003 Separation DC: Low Spd: 1st *ENG 004 Separation DC: Low Spd: 2nd *ENG [Plain2: Bias: BW] 2440...
  • Page 407 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 017 Edge Separation DC: Standard: 1st *ENG 018 Edge Separation DC: Standard: 2nd *ENG [1 to 100 / 50 / 1 /step] 019 Edge Separation DC: Low: 1st *ENG 020 Edge Separation DC: Low: 2nd *ENG [Thin: Bias] 2451...
  • Page 408 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Separation DC: Middle Spd: 1st *ENG 002 Separation DC: Middle Spd: 2nd *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V / step] 003 Separation DC: Low Spd: 1st *ENG 004 Separation DC: Low Spd: 2nd *ENG [Thick 1: Bias: BW] 2502...
  • Page 409 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 2: Paper Size Correction: BW] 2561 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values. [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step] 003 Paper Transfer: 1 Side: S1 *ENG S1 size ≥...
  • Page 410 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [100 to 995 / 150 / 5% /step] 007 Paper Transfer: 1 Side: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 160 / 5% /step] 008 Paper Transfer: 2 Side: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 411 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 [OHP: Paper Size Correction: BW] 2611 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values. [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step] 003 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG S1 size ≥...
  • Page 412 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Separation DC: 1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd *ENG [Thick3: Bias: BW] 2648 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in black-and-white mode. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 9 / 1 –...
  • Page 413 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: 1 Side: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer: 2 Side: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 414 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Separation DC: Standard Spd: 1st *ENG 002 Separation DC: Standard Spd: 2nd *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step] 003 Separation DC: Low Spd: 1st *ENG 004 Separation DC: Low Spd: 2nd *ENG [Middle Thick:Bias:BW] Standard: 260mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec...
  • Page 415 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 [Special 1: Bias: BW] 2753 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black-and-white mode. Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 20 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1 –...
  • Page 416 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Paper Transfer: Middle: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 15 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 9 / 1 – A /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 12 / 1 –...
  • Page 417 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-2 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 12 / 1 – A /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1 – A /step] 2920 [Bk Transfer Motor Ctrl] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 001 Bk TransferMotorCtrl *ENG...

  • Page 418: Main Sp Tables-3

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-3 SP3-XXX (Process) 3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution] Executes the normal process control manually (potential control). 001 Normal Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing this SP. Executes the toner density adjustment manually. 002 Density Adjst Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing this SP.
  • Page 419 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 001 History: Latest *ENG 002 Result: Latest 1 *ENG 003 Result: Latest 2 *ENG 004 Result: Latest 3 *ENG 005 Result: Latest 4 *ENG [1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 006 Result: Latest 5 *ENG 007 Result: Latest 6 *ENG...
  • Page 420 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 3015 [Forced Toner Supply: Execute] Forced Toner Supply ([Color]) 001 Execution: ALL 002 Execution: COL (MCY) 003 Execution: Bk Executes the manual toner supply to the development unit. 004 Execution: C 005 Execution: M 006 Execution: Y [Forced Toner Supply Cntl] Forced Toner Supply Setting ([Color]) 3016...
  • Page 421 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 Enables or disables developer initialization. 009 Prohibition *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Enable, 1: Disable [Toner Replenishment Mode] 3022 Sets the toner supply flag of each color. 005 Execution Flag: Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 006 Execution Flag: C...
  • Page 422 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step] 0: Not Execute Pre-ACC Process Control *ENG 1: Process Control 2: TC Control Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: FIXED Pattern Caluculation *ENG...
  • Page 423 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 Repeat Number: Non-use *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in stand by mode. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
  • Page 424 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Consumption Pattern: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step] Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment. Consumption Pattern: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]...
  • Page 425 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 Consumption Pattern: LD: DUTY: M *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step] Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment. In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values (SP3611-003) exceed the target values (SP3611-007) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009).
  • Page 426 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Current: M *ENG 004 Current: Y *ENG [Vt Shift: Display/Set] 3211 Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed. Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 001 Med Speed Shift:Bk *ENG...
  • Page 427 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 001 260 Current: Bk *ENG 002 260 Current: C *ENG [2.45 to 5 / 3.7 / 0.01 V/step] 003 260 Current: M *ENG 004 260 Current: Y *ENG 005 260 Initial: Bk *ENG 006 260 Initial: C *ENG [2.45 to 5 / 3.7 / 0.01 V/step] 007 260 Initial: M...
  • Page 428 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 005 Initial: Bk *ENG 006 Initial: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Initial: M *ENG 008 Initial: Y *ENG 009 Pixel Correction: Bk *ENG [-5 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step] 010 Pixel Correction: C *ENG 011 Pixel Correction: M...
  • Page 429 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 014 T Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.16 / 0.01 V/step] 015 Correct Value Coef *ENG [1 to 2.5 / 9.99 / 0.01 /step] 3241 [Background Potential Setting] 001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the charge bias referring to the development bias at process...
  • Page 430 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 009 Middle Speed: Coef: Bk *ENG 010 Middle Speed: Coef: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 141 / 1 /step] 011 Middle Speed: Coef: M *ENG 012 Middle Speed: Coef: Y *ENG 013 Middle Speed: Offset: Bk *ENG 014 Middle Speed: Offset: C *ENG...
  • Page 431 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 005 Average S: Bk *ENG 006 Average S: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step] 007 Average S: M *ENG 008 Average S: Y *ENG Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction. 009-012 "Average M"...
  • Page 432 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG 025 Latest Coverage: C *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step] 026 Latest Coverage: M *ENG 027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not. DevAgi.
  • Page 433 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 [Vsg Adjustment Result: Vsg] 3322 Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor. 001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG 002 Vsg reg: C *ENG 003 Vsg reg: M *ENG 004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG 005 Vsg dif: C *ENG...
  • Page 434 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [Fixed Supply Mode] 3401 Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode. 001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step] 002 Fixed Rate: C *ENG These SPs are used only when SP3-044 is set to 003 Fixed Rate: M *ENG "0".
  • Page 435 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 001 Bk *ENG Displays the toner supply time carried over from 002 C *ENG a previous toner supply mode for each color. 003 M *ENG [0 to 10000 / 0 / 1 msec/step] 004 Y *ENG [Toner Supply: Setting] 3453...
  • Page 436 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Process Control: BW *ENG 002 Process Control: FC *ENG 003 Power ON: BW *ENG 004 Power ON: FC *ENG 005 MUSIC: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step] 006 MUSIC: FC *ENG 007 Vsg Adj.
  • Page 437 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 024 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.59 / 0.01/step] 025 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step] 026 Correction Coeff. 1: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step] 027 Correction Coeff.
  • Page 438 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step] 003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/cm /step] [Execution Interval: Display] Displays the current interval for process control execution. 3515 When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of conditions.
  • Page 439 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 002 Non-use Time Setting *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step] 003 Temp. Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1 deg/step] 004 Relative Humidity Change *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step] 005 Absolute Humidity Change *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m...
  • Page 440 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Displays the target development gamma for C/ M/Y. 006 C (Target Display) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.85 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 007 M (Target Display) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 008 Y (Target Display) *ENG...
  • Page 441 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 001 Bk *ENG 002 C *ENG [-300 to 300 / 0 / 1 V/step] 003 M *ENG 004 Y *ENG [Development DC Control:Display] Standard: 260 mm/sec, Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 3621 Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color.
  • Page 442 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Standard Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Standard Speed:C *ENG 003 Standard Speed:M *ENG 004 Standard Speed:Y *ENG 005 Middle Speed:Bk *ENG 006 Middle Speed:C *ENG [0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step] 007 Middle Speed:M *ENG 008 Middle Speed:Y *ENG...
  • Page 443 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 001 Standard Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Standard Speed:C *ENG 003 Standard Speed:M *ENG 004 Standard Speed:Y *ENG 005 Middle Speed:Bk *ENG 006 Middle Speed:C *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] 007 Middle Speed:M *ENG 008 Middle Speed:Y *ENG...
  • Page 444 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step] 008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step] 009 Serial Number 1 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step] 010 Serial Number 2 *ENG 011 Adjustment: Vt...
  • Page 445 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step] 016 182 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] [HST Concentration Control: M] 3713 Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCU.
  • Page 446 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step] 005 Sensitivity: ML *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step] 006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]...
  • Page 447 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-3 Not used Displays the pixel counter after replacement of 005 Pixel Count After Near Full2 *ENG toner collection bottle. [0 to 100000000 / 0 / 1 /step] 006 Print Page After Replacement *ENG [0 to 100000 / 0 / 1 sheet /step] 007 Pixel Count After Replacement *ENG [0 to 100000000 / 0 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 448 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 013 ITB Unit *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON Do not use 3902-013 if you only change the 015 Fusing Roller *ENG cleaning unit. 016 Fusing Belt *ENG 3902-015: This is for the image transfer belt...

  • Page 449: Main Sp Tables-4

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4 Main SP Tables-4 SP4-XXX (Scanner) [Scanner Free Run] 4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode. Full color mode / Full Size / A4 or LT 001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] *ENG...
  • Page 450 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Off 003 Dust Reject: Level *ENG 1: Weakest 2: Weak 3: Strong 4: Strongest [Org Erase Mask] *ENG...
  • Page 451 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4 0: Scanned image 13: Grid pattern CMYK 1: Gradation main scan A 14: Color patch CMYK 2: Gradation main scan B 15: Gray pattern (1) 3: Gradation main scan C 16: Gray pattern (2) 4: Gradation main scan D 17: Gray Pattern (3) 5: Gradation sub scan (1)
  • Page 452 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [ACC Target Density] 4501 Selects the ACC result. 001 Copy: K: Text *ENG 002 Copy: C: Text *ENG 003 Copy: M: Text *ENG 004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step] 10: Darkest density 005 Copy: K: Photo *ENG...
  • Page 453 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4 001 Text:K *ENG 002 Text:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Text:M *ENG 004 Text:Y *ENG 005 Photo:K *ENG 006 Photo:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 007 Photo:M *ENG 008 Photo:Y...
  • Page 454 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 4600 [SBU Version Display] 001 SBU_ID Displays the ID of the SBU. 002 GASBU-N_ID Displays the ID of the GASBU. 003 VSP5100_ID Displays t he ID of the VSP5100. 4602 [Scanner Memory Access] Enables the read and write check for the SBU 001 Scanner Memory Access registers.
  • Page 455 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board 001 Latest: RE Color (color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board 002 Latest: RO Color (color printing speed).
  • Page 456 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [Analog Gain Adjustment] 4629 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. 001 Latest: G Color [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Analog Gain Adjustment] 4630 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Latest: B Color [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Digital Gain Adjustment]...
  • Page 457 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4 [Scanner Hard Error] 4647 Displays the result of the SBU connection check. [0 to 35535 / 0 / 1digit /step] 001 Power-ON 0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure If the SBU connection check fails, SC144 occurs. [Black Level Adj.
  • Page 458 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Displays the black offset value for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing Last Correct Value: BE *ENG speed). Color [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing Last Correct Value: BO *ENG...
  • Page 459 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4 [Digital Gain Adjustment] 4663 BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Last Correct Value: BO Color *ENG [Black Level Adj.
  • Page 460 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit 002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG board (color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Analog Gain Adjustment] 4677 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
  • Page 461 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4 001 Latest: BE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: BO Color *ENG [DF Density Adjustment] 4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF. Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different.
  • Page 462 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [Black Level Peak Read] 4694 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. 001 GE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 GO [Black Level Peak Read] 4695 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. 001 BE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 BO...
  • Page 463 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-4 [0 to 250 / 0 / 1 /step] 1: Grid pattern 001 - 2: Gradation main scan 3: Gradation sub scan 4 to 250: Default (Scanning Image) [ACC Data Display] This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution. 4902 A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
  • Page 464 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance RGB Frame Memory *ENG [0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step ] 0: Scanner input RGB images 1: Scanner I/F RGB images 2: RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON) 3: Shading data 4 to 11: Not used 4993...

  • Page 465: Main Sp Tables-5

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Main SP Tables-5 SP5-XXX (Mode) [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 1: inch (USA) [Accounting Counter] Selects the counting method. 5045 NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
  • Page 466 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display [Toner Remaining Icon Display Change] 5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL...
  • Page 467 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: No display, 1: Display [Parts PM System Setting] 5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts. If the user service is selected, PM alart is displayed on the LCD. 001 PCU (Drum Unit):Bk *CTL 002 PCU (Drum Unit):M...
  • Page 468 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance This program specifies the counter type. 0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4) 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card Default Optional Counter *CTL Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card 8: Key counter + Vendor 9: Bar-code Printer This program specifies the external counter type.
  • Page 469 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 [0 to 2 / 1: NA, 2: EU / 1] 1.NA 2.EU ASIA 0: Japan, 1: NA, 2: EU Selects the paper size type (for originals and paper). After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on. 5150 [By-Pass Length Setting] *CTL...
  • Page 470 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5199 [Paper Exit After Staple End.] [ 0 or 1 / 0 / -] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling. • If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).
  • Page 471 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step] 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode. • Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
  • Page 472 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5404 [User Code Counter Clear] 001 - *CTL Clears all counters for users. 5411 [LDAP Certification] Determines whether easy LDAP certification is done. 004 Easy Certification *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 1: On, 0: Off This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set to "1"...
  • Page 473 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user ID and password after a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only 004 Cancellation Time *CTL if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on). [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min.] 5414 [Access Mitigation]...
  • Page 474 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password information. 003 Monitor Interval *CTL [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec.] 5417 [Access Attack] Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive number of attempts are detected for MFP 001 Access Permissible Number *CTL...
  • Page 475 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Color Security Setting *CTL Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the user authentication is "ON". 0: Enable (default), 1: Disable Bit0: B/W mode Bit1: Mono color mode Bit2: Two colors mode Bit3: Full color mode Bit4: Automatic color mode Bit5 to 7: Reserved...
  • Page 476 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [Authentication Error Code] 5481 These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed. Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user authentication failure occurs. 001 System Log Disp *CTL [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: Off, 1: On...
  • Page 477 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 [Error Alarm] Sets the error alarm level. The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm 5505 counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
  • Page 478 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5508* [CC Call] *CTL - Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable 001* Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam. Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable 002* Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams. Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable 003*...
  • Page 479 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 008 Alarm Notice 0: Off, 1: On 009 Non Genuin Tonner Alarm 010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Off, 1: On 011 Supply Manegement Report Call 012 Jam/Door Open Call •...
  • Page 480 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode. [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
  • Page 481 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control 003 SCS Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information. 004 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the IMH settings. 005 Mcs Initializes the Mcs settings. 006 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings.
  • Page 482 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control 017 CCS Service) settings. 018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings. 019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings. 020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings. 021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.
  • Page 483 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Telephone *CTL Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user's "Counter" menu. This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input). Facsimile *CTL Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative.
  • Page 484 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance SSL Disable Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Uses the RCG certification 1: Does no use the RCG certification RCG Connect Timeout Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
  • Page 485 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Install Status This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation status. 0: RCG device not registered 1: RCG device registered 2: Device registered Connect Mode (N/M) This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step 0: Internet connection 1: Dial-up connection...
  • Page 486 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Proxy User Name This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name. • The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored. • This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. Proxy Password This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
  • Page 487 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event. The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event.
  • Page 488 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 - [NV-RAM Data Download] Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For details, see the 5825 "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "System Maintenance Reference" of the Field Service Manual.
  • Page 489 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each protocol. 0: Validates 1: Invalidates bit0: LPR bit1: FTP 069 Job Spooling (Protocol) bit2: IPP bit3: SMB bit4: BMLinkS bit5: DIPRINT bit6: sftp bit7: (Reserved) Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.
  • Page 490 Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the web system. 237 Web shopping link visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Not display, 1:Display CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 491 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top page and link page of the web system. 238 Web supplies Link visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Not display, 1:Display This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page 239 Web Link1 Name of the web system.
  • Page 492 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 HDD Formatting (ALL) 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) 004 HDD Formatting (Job Log) 005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if there 006 HDD Formatting (User Info) is a hard disk error.
  • Page 493 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped) , 077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200 6: 2/3 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped) , 078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200 6: 2/3 5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format...
  • Page 494 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Sets the IP address for the primary capture server. This is 101 Primary srv IP address basically adjusted by the remote system. 102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 103 Primary srv port number This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 495 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 This is basically adjusted by the remote system. Reso: Fax (Color) [0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step] Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 496 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust 5840 007 Channel MIN *CTL...
  • Page 497 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card. 5840 042 Fragment Thresh *CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1] This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed. Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.
  • Page 498 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Default: 00000000 – do not change Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document 001 Setting 1 *CTL server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software Adjusts the debug program modesetting. Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting 002 Setting 2 *CTL 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second...
  • Page 499 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting. Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step] Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external...
  • Page 500 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered. Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user) Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link Bit5 to 0: Not used 013 -...
  • Page 501 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 Fill Addr Acl Info. This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD.
  • Page 502 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot. Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-protected. 053 Clear Backup Info •...
  • Page 503 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 [Rep Resolution Reduction] *CTL SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data transferred externally by the Net File page reference function. [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step] 5847 SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile. “Net files”...
  • Page 504 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [Web Service] *CTL SP5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001 5848 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router. 5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
  • Page 505 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 [Stamp Data Download] Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. This SP must be executed 5853 after replacing or formatting the hard disks.
  • Page 506 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 011 Erase HDD Debug Data 012 Erase SD Card Debug Data 013 Free Space on SD Card 014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB) 015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key) 016 Make HDD Debug 017 Make SD Debug [Debug Save When]...
  • Page 507 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 001 Key 1 002 Key 2 003 Key 3 004 Key 4 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for 005 Key 5 functions that use common memory on the controller board.
  • Page 508 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Selects the authentication method for SMPT. Bit switch: • Bit 0: LOGIN • Bit 1: PLAIN • Bit 2: CRAM MD5 • Bit 3: DIGEST MD5 • Bit 4 to 7: Not used • This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode. Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by S/MIME.
  • Page 509 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 5875 [SC Auto Reboot] Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs. [0 or 1/ 0 / – ] 0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. 001 Reboot Setting *CTL If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not...
  • Page 510 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5888 [Personal Information Protect] Selects the protection level for logs. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1} 001 - *CTL 0: No authentication, No protection for logs 1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs) [SDK Application Counter] 5893...
  • Page 511 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-5 5967 [Copy Server Set Function] *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.

  • Page 512: Main Sp Tables-6

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-6 SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 6006 [ADF Adj.] ADF Adjustment Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF. 001 Side-to-Side Registration *ENG [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] 003 Leading Edge Registration *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]...
  • Page 513 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-6 001 DF Magnification Adj. *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step] [Jogger Fence Fine Adj] This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the 6132 finisher stapling tray in the Finisher.

  • Page 514: Main Sp Tables-7

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-7 SP7-XXX (Data Log) [Total SC Counter] 7401 Displays the number of SC codes detected. 001 - *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ] [SC History] Logs the SC codes detected. 7403 The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
  • Page 515 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 *CTL 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 [Total Paper Jam Counter] 7502 Displays the total number of jams detected.
  • Page 516 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 At Power On *CTL 003 Tray 1: ON *CTL 004 Tray 2: ON *CTL 005 Tray 3: ON *CTL 006 Tray 4: ON *CTL For details, "p.724 "Jam 008 Bypass: ON *CTL Detection"" 009 Duplex: ON *CTL 011 Vertical Transport 1: ON...
  • Page 517 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 051 Vertical Transport Sn1: Off *CTL 052 Vertical Transport Sn2: Off *CTL 053 Vertical Transport Sn3: Off *CTL 054 Vertical Transport Sn4: Off *CTL 057 Regist Sensor: Off *CTL 060 Exit Sensor: Off *CTL For details, "p.724 "Jam Detection""...
  • Page 518 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [ARDF Paper Jam Location] ON: On check, OFF: Off Check 7505 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected. 001 At Power On *CTL 004 Registration: ON *CTL For details, "p.724 "Jam 008 Reverse: ON *CTL...
  • Page 519 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 *CTL 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 [ROM No./Firmware Version] 7801 Displays the ROM version numbers of the main machine and connected peripheral devices.
  • Page 520 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 005 Page: PCU: Y 006 Page: Development Unit: Bk 007 Page: Development Unit: C 008 Page: Development Unit: M 009 Page: Development Unit: Y 014 Page: Image Transfer 015 Page: Image Transfer Cleaning 016 Page: Fusing Unit 017 Page: Fusing Roller 018 Page: Fusing Belt 019 Page:PTR Unit...
  • Page 521 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 044 Rotation: Image Transfer Cleaning 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Fusing Roller 047 Rotation: Fusing Belt 048 Rotation: PTR Unit Measurement Toner Collection Bottle [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mg/step ] Displays the total amount of each waiaaste toner bottle.
  • Page 522 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 077 Rotation (%): Fusing Belt 078 Rotation (%):PTR Unit Measurement (%) Toner Collection Bottle [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step] Displays how much of the unit's expected lifetime has been used up. Displays the value given by the following formula: (Target printouts/ Current printouts) 100.
  • Page 523 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 [PM Counter Reset] (Unit, [Color]) 7804 Clears the PM counter. Press the Enter key after the machine asks "Execute?", which will store the PM counter value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the current PM counter (SP7-803) to "0".
  • Page 524 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [SC/Jam Counter Reset] 7807 Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams. 001 - *CTL [Self-Diagnose Result Display] 7832 Displays the result of the diagnostics. 001 - *CTL Total Memory Size 7836 Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
  • Page 525 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 008 Development Unit: Y 013 Image Transfer 014 Image Transfer Belt Cleaning 015 Fusing Unit 016 Fusing Roller 017 Fusing Belt 018 PTR Unit 019 Toner Collection Bottle [Coverage Range] Sets the color coverage threshold. Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3 •...
  • Page 526 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [Assert Info] 7901 Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU 001 File Name 002 Number of Lines *CTL 003 Location [Prev.
  • Page 527 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units. -031 to -049 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step ] 031 Rotation: PCU: Bk 032 Rotation: PCU: C 033 Rotation: PCU: M 034 Rotation: PCU: Y 035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk...
  • Page 528 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 068 Rotation %: Development Unit: Y 073 Rotation %: Image Transfer 074 Rotation %: Image Transfer Cleaning 075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit 076 Rotation %: Fusing Roller 077 Rotation %: Fusing Belt 078 Rotation %: PTR Unit 079 Measurement %: Toner Collection Bottle Displays the value given by the following formula: -091 to...
  • Page 529 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle Bk] 7931 Displays the toner bottle information for Bk. 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *ENG 003 Brand ID *ENG 004 Area ID *ENG 005 Product ID *ENG 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID *ENG...
  • Page 530 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *ENG 003 Brand ID *ENG 004 Area ID *ENG 005 Product ID *ENG 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID *ENG 008 New Product Information *ENG 009 Recycle Counter *ENG 010 Date...
  • Page 531 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *ENG 003 Brand ID *ENG 004 Area ID *ENG 005 Product ID *ENG 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID *ENG 008 New Product Information *ENG 009 Recycle Counter *ENG 010 Date...
  • Page 532 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *ENG 003 Brand ID *ENG 004 Area ID *ENG 005 Product ID *ENG 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID *ENG 008 New Product Information *ENG 009 Recycle Counter *ENG 010 Date...
  • Page 533 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 1 for Bk. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 005 Serial No. 006 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 2 for Bk.
  • Page 534 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 005 Serial No. 006 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 2 for M. 007 Attachment: Total Counter 008 Refill Information 009 Serial No. 010 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 3 for M.
  • Page 535 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 009 Serial No. 010 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 3 for C. 011 Attachment: Total Counter 012 Refill Information 013 Serial No. 014 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 4 for C.
  • Page 536 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 013 Serial No. 014 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 4 for Y. 015 Attachment: Total Counter 016 Refill Information 017 Serial No. 018 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 5 for Y.
  • Page 537 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 [Remaining Day Counter] *ENG 7951 Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit. [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step] 001 Page: PCU: Bk 002 Page: PCU: C 003 Page: PCU: M 004 Page: PCU: Y 005 Page: Development Unit: Bk 006 Page: Development Unit: C...
  • Page 538 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 040 Rotation: Developer: C 041 Rotation: Developer: M 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation: Image Transfer Belt 044 Rotation: Image Transfer Cleaning 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Fusing Roller 047 Rotation: Fusing Belt 048 Rotation: PTR Unit 049 Measurement: Toner Collection Bottle [PM Yield Setting]...
  • Page 539 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 013 Page: Fusing Unit *ENG 014 Page: Fusing Roller *ENG [0 to 999999 / 120000 / 1 sheet/step] 015 Page: Fusing Belt *ENG 016 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 999999 / 180000 / 1000 sheet/step] 021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk *ENG Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each...
  • Page 540 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 038 Rotation: PCU: Bk *ENG *ENG 039 Rotation: PCU: C 040 Rotation: PCU: M *ENG *ENG 041 Rotation: PCU: Y Rotation: Development Unit: *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Rotation: Development Unit: *ENG Rotation: Development Unit: *ENG...
  • Page 541 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-7 001 T<=0 002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30 003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70 004 T<=5: 70<=H<=100 005 5<T<15: 0<=H<30 *ENG [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step] 006 5<T<15: 30<=H<55 007 5<T<15: 55<=H<80 008 5<T<15: 80<=H<=100 009 15<=T<25: 0<=H<30 010 15<=T<25: 30<=H<55 011 15<=T<25: 55<=H<80 012 15<=T<25: 80<=H<=100 013 25<=T<30: 0<=H<30...

  • Page 542: Main Sp Tables-8

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-8 SP8-XXX (Data Log2) Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
  • Page 543 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L: counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in document server mode (from the document server Local storage (document window), or from another mode, such as from a printer driver server)
  • Page 544 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Abbreviation What it means Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to DesApl store the job on the document server, for example. Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed. Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides Emul Emulation...
  • Page 545 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 Abbreviation What it means Personal Computer Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON. PJob Print Jobs Paper...
  • Page 546 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance T:Total Jobs *CTL 8 001 These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job. 8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other applications are used to send a job to the document server,...
  • Page 547 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 • When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments. • When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments. 8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL...
  • Page 548 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance • When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the L: counter increments. •...
  • Page 549 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to send files from 8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL the document server over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by 8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL...
  • Page 550 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode 8 066 screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode.
  • Page 551 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 073 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job.
  • Page 552 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance • If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job. • If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the error occurs.
  • Page 553 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored on the 8 123 document server), as fax images using I-Fax. Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
  • Page 554 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 141 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent to a Scan Router server. S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner mode...
  • Page 555 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 • These counters count jobs, not pages. • If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted. • If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. •...
  • Page 556 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL 8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the scanner to scan images. 8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 195 S:Total Scan PGS...
  • Page 557 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the document server . 8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the 8 215...
  • Page 558 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work load on the ADF. Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the 8 231 1 Large Volume ADF at one time.
  • Page 559 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document 8 246 server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 241 8 242...
  • Page 560 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at the operation panel for each 8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL application. Some examples of these editing features are: 8 255 S : Scan PGS/ImgEdr...
  • Page 561 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit. 8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the 8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp...
  • Page 562 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 30x 1 A3 8 30x 2 A4 8 30x 3 A5 8 30x 4 B4 8 30x 5 B5 8 30x 6 DLT 8 30x 7 LG 8 30x 8 LT 8 30x 9 HLT 8 30x 10 Full Bleed 8 30x 254 Other (Standard) 8 30x 255 Other (Custom)
  • Page 563 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed by the 8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL customer. The counter for the application used for 8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL storing the pages increments. [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 384 P:Total PrtPGS...
  • Page 564 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance • Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count. • Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count. This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
  • Page 565 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 42x 3 Book> Duplex 8 42x 4 Simplex Combine 8 42x 5 Duplex Combine 8 42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up) 8 42x 7 4> 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up) 8 42x 8 6>...
  • Page 566 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application.
  • Page 567 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application. S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 445 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application.
  • Page 568 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 451 1 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray 8 451 2 Tray 1 Machine 8 451 3 Tray 2 Paper Tray Unit (Option) 8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option) 8 451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option) 8 451 6 Tray 5 Not used...
  • Page 569 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 463 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 464 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
  • Page 570 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance • Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted. • Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are counted. • The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of 100%.
  • Page 571 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 50x 5 Two Color T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed. P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 514 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
  • Page 572 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application. F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax 8 523 application.
  • Page 573 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 52x 13 Perfect-Bind 8 52x 14 Ring-Bind • If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are still counted. • The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted. This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine.
  • Page 574 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 581 15 Mono Color Print 8 581 16 Full Color GPC 8 581 17 Twin Colour Mode Print 8 581 18 Full Colour Print (Twin) 8 581 19 Mono Colour Print (Twin) 8 581 20 Full Colour Total (CV) 8 581 21 Mono Colour Total (CV) 8 581 22 Full Colour Print (CV) 8 582...
  • Page 575 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 584 5 Two Color 8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color output. 8 582 1 B/W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color...
  • Page 576 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 617 1 SDK-1 8 617 2 SDK-2 8 617 3 SDK-3 8 617 4 SDK-4 8 617 5 SDK-5 8 617 6 SDK-6 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 631 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.
  • Page 577 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 64x 2 Color • If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/ W or Color. • At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same.
  • Page 578 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications. S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 579 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 • When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.) 8 691 T:TX PGS/LS...
  • Page 580 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single) 8 715 3 PDF 8 715 4 Other 8 715 5 PDF/Comp 8 721 T: Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] S: Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL 8 725 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
  • Page 581 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development rollers) for black and other color toners. 8 771 1 Total 8 771 2 K 8 771 3 Y 8 771 4 M...
  • Page 582 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 801 4 C CVr Cnt: 0-10% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 0% to 10%. 8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK 8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y...
  • Page 583 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 871 4 C CVr Cnt: 31%- *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 881 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 31% or higher. 8 881 1 BK 8 881 2 Y 8 881 3 M...
  • Page 584 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 911 3 M 8 911 4 C Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 921 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color. 8 921 1 Coverage (%) Bk 8 921 2 Coverage (%) Y 8 921 3 Coverage (%) M 8 921 4 Coverage (%) C...
  • Page 585 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-8 8 941 6 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying. Total time when paper jams have been staying during 8 941 7 PrtJam printing. Total time when original jams have been staying during 8 941 8 OrgJam scanning.
  • Page 586 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8 999 1 Total 8 999 2 Copy: Full Color 8 999 3 Copy: BW 8 999 4 Copy: Single Color 8 999 5 Copy: Two Color 8 999 6 Printer Full Color 8 999 7 Printer BW 8 999 8 Printer Single Color 8 999 9 Printer Two Color 8 999 10 Fax Print: BW...

  • Page 587: Main Sp Tables-9

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 Main SP Tables-9 Input Check Table When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table. Bit No. Result 0 or 1 0 or 1...
  • Page 588 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5803 16 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 17 Bypass Paper Size Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 18 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner end Toner remaining 5803 19 Toner End Sensor: C Toner end Toner remaining 5803 20 Toner End Sensor: M...
  • Page 589 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 5803 47 Feed Fan: Lock Normal Lock 5803 48 Transfer Belt Contact Sensor Not contact Contact 5803 49 Paper Transfer Roller Contact Sensor Not contact Contact 5803 50 Drum Motor: K: Lock Normal Lock 5803 51 Fusing Motor: Lock Normal Lock...
  • Page 590 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5803 77 Bank Feed Sensor 1 Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 78 Bank Feed Sensor 2 Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 79 Bank Feed Sensor 3 Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 80 Bank Vertical Feed Sensor 1 Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 81 Bank Vertical Feed Sensor 2...
  • Page 591 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 Models Paper size sensor North America Europe/Asia B6, B5 B6, B5 Table 3: Paper Size Switch (Tray 3 and 4) Switch 1 is used for tray set detection. 0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed Models Paper size sensor North America Europe/Asia...
  • Page 592 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 6007 9 Original Detection Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 13 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 15 Feed Cover ADF cover closed ADF cover open 6007 17 Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Internal Finisher Reading...

  • Page 593: Output Check Table

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 Output Check Table Copier 5804 Display Description 5804 3 Drum Motor: K: 260mm/s 5804 4 Drum Motor: K: 182mm/s 5804 5 Drum Motor: K: 85mm/s 5804 10 Fusing Motor: 260mm/s 5804 11 Fusing Motor: 182mm/s 5804 12 Fusing Motor: 85mm/s 5804 17 Development Motor: CMY: 260mm/s 5804 18 Development Motor: CMY: 182mm/s...
  • Page 594 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5804 48 Inverter Motor: CW: 182mm/s 5804 49 Inverter Motor: CW: 85mm/s 5804 54 Inverter Motor: CCW: 468mm/s 5804 55 Inverter Motor: CCW: 260mm/s 5804 56 Inverter Motor: CCW: 182mm/s 5804 57 Inverter Motor: CCW: 85mm/s 5804 62 By-pass Motor: CCW: 260mm/s 5804 63 By-pass Motor: CCW: 182mm/s 5804 64 By-pass Motor: CCW: 85mm/s...
  • Page 595 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 5804 92 Toner Supply Motor: M 5804 93 Toner Supply Motor: C 5804 94 Toner Supply Motor: Y 5804 95 LDU Shutter Motor: CW 5804 96 LDU Shutter Motor: CCW 5804 100 Fusing Fan: H 5804 101 Fusing Fan: L 5804 102 Fusing Fan 1: H 5804 103 Fusing Fan 1: L...
  • Page 596 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5804 122 1 Tray Lock Solenoid 5804 123 1 Tray Feed Solenoid 5804 124 Junction Gate Solenoid 1 5804 125 Junction Gate Solenoid 2 5804 130 PP: Charge DC: Y 5804 131 PP: Charge DC: M 5804 132 PP: Charge DC: C 5804 133 PP: Charge DC: K 5804 134 PP: Development: Y...
  • Page 597 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 5804 162 PP: Charge AC: C: 182mm/s 5804 163 PP: Charge AC: C: 85mm/s 5804 168 PP: Charge AC: K: 260mm/s 5804 169 PP: Charge AC: K: 182mm/s 5804 170 PP: Charge AC: K: 85mm/s 5804 181 HST Sensor: Y 5804 182 HST Sensor: M 5804 183 HST Sensor: C...
  • Page 598 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 5804 217 LD2: K 5804 218 LD1: C 5804 219 LD2: C 5804 220 LD1: M 5804 221 LD2: M 5804 222 LD1: Y 5804 223 LD2: Y 5804 224 Bank Motor 1: 364mm/s 5804 225 Bank Motor 1: 260mm/s 5804 226 Bank Motor 1: 182mm/s 5804 227 Bank Motor 1: 136mm/s...
  • Page 599 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 5804 243 Bank Pick-up Solenoid 2 5804 244 Bank Pick-up Solenoid 3 5804 245 Bank Tray Lock Solenoid 1 5804 246 Bank Tray Lock Solenoid 2 ARDF 6008 Display Description 6008 3 Feed Motor: Forward 6008 4 Feed Motor: Reverse 6008 5 Relay Motor: Forward 6008 9 Feed Clutch...

  • Page 600: Printer Service Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Printer Service Mode SP1-XXX (Service Mode) 1001 Bit Switch 001 Bit Switch 1 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: The machine I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
  • Page 601 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable Disable: The machine ability to change the PDL processor mid-job. Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
  • Page 602 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch 0: Disable 1: Enable Type" buttons on the operation panel. If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch bit 0 Type from the operation panel.
  • Page 603 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation for the 0: Disable 1: Enable edge to bind on. If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs. The old models are below: - PCL: Pre-04A models - PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models...
  • Page 604 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 008 Bit Switch 8 bit 0 to 2 1: Enable (allow BW [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without requiring 0: Disable jobs to print User Code without a user bit 3 code) BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if user code authentication is enabled.
  • Page 605 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 1004 [Print Summary] Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the 1004 001 Service Summary controller settings). 1005 [Display Version] 1005 001 Printer Version Displays the version of the controller firmware. 1007 [Supply Display] Enables or disables the display for information on each consumable supply.
  • Page 606 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance [ToneCtlSet] Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The asterisk (*) shows which mode is set. • 00: *1200x1200Photo 1102 • 01: 600x600Text • 02: 1200x1200Text • 03: 1200x600Text • 04: 600x600Photo •...
  • Page 607 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 1104 004 Set Black 4 1104 024 Set Cyan 4 [0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step] 1104 044 Set Magenta 4 1104 064 Set Yellow 4 1104 005 Set Black 5 1104 025 Set Cyan 5 [0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step] 1104 045...
  • Page 608 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 1104 010 Set Black 10 1104 030 Set Cyan 10 [0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step] 1104 050 Set Magenta 10 1104 070 Set Yellow 10 1104 011 Set Black 11 1104 031 Set Cyan 11 [0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step] 1104 051...

  • Page 609: Scanner Service Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 [ToneCtlSave] Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current Setting. Before 1105 the machine stores the new "current settingR", it moves the data stored as the "current setting" to the "previous setting" memory-storage location. [Toner Limit Value] 1106 Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.

  • Page 610: Test Pattern Printing

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 1010 [Non Display Clear Light PDF] *CTL 0: Display, 1: No display 1010 1 Enable or disable remote scan. SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) [Compression Level (Gray-scale)] 2021...
  • Page 611 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Main SP Tables-9 2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [OK]. 3. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test pattern, select the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Cyan, 3: Magenta, 4: Yellow).
  • Page 612 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Independent Pattern (1dot) Full Dot Pattern CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 613: Firmware Update

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Firmware Update Firmware Update To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the left rear side of the controller box.

  • Page 614: Before You Begin

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Flash ROM on the PictBridge PictBridge control PictBridge controller board Flash ROM on the MediaPrint:JPEG/ MediaPrint:JPEG/TIFF MediaPrint control controller board TIFF Flash ROM on the Summary Font Summary fonts FONT controller board Flash ROM on the PCL Font PCL fonts FONT1...

  • Page 615: Updating Firmware

    • If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card. • If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "M022" folder onto the card. If the card already contains folders up to " M022"", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. D086xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
  • Page 616 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure the SD card locks in place. • To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops out of the slot. 5.

  • Page 617: Update Procedure For App2Me Provider

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Firmware Update Firmware Update Error If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card. Recovery after Power Loss If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again.
  • Page 618 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 8. Prepare the newer App2Me Provider zip file from the Firmware Download Center, and then unzip the zip file (The folder name is "337051920"). 9. Copy the App2Me Provider folder into the specified path for the VM card. The path is: "SD_Card Drive\ sdk\dsdk\dist\337051920"...

  • Page 619: Browser Unit Update Procedure

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Firmware Update Browser Unit Update Procedure 1. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1). 2. Remove the VM card from slot 2. 3. Turn the SD-card label face of the browser unit to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click.

  • Page 620: Handling Firmware Update Errors

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 16. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen. 17. Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch. 18. Remove the SD card of the browser unit from SD card slot 2. 19.
  • Page 621 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Firmware Update SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is Module mismatch - Module on SD for another machine. Acquire correct update data then card is not for this machine install again. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is Cannot write module - Cause for another machine.

  • Page 622: Installing Another Language

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Installing Another Language Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operation panel.
  • Page 623 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Installing Another Language 8. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language. • If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse. •...
  • Page 624 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download. Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading. The following occur at the time the language is downloading: •...

  • Page 625: Reboot/System Setting Reset

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Reboot/System Setting Reset Reboot/System Setting Reset Software Reset You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures: 1. Turn the main power switch off and on. 2. Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons.
  • Page 626 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Copier Setting Reset Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults. 1. Press User Tools/Counter 2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings. • You must press first.

  • Page 627: Controller Self-Diagnostics

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Controller Self-Diagnostics Controller Self-Diagnostics Overview There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller. 1. Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just after the power has been turned on. 2. SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or during operation. The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
  • Page 628 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 629: Downloading Stamp Data

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Downloading Stamp Data Downloading Stamp Data The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following times: • After the hard disks have been replaced. The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.

  • Page 630: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance NVRAM Data Upload/Download Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card. • This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. •...
  • Page 631 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA NVRAM Data Upload/Download 2. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1). 3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2. 4. Switch the copier main power switch on. 5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key. •...

  • Page 632: Address Book Upload/Download

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Address Book Upload/Download Information List The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded. Information • Registration No. • Select Title • User Code • Folder • E-mail • Local Authentication • Protection Code •...

  • Page 633: Upload

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Address Book Upload/Download Upload 1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine. 2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1). 3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2. 4.

  • Page 634: Using The Debug Log

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Using the Debug Log Overview This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
  • Page 635 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Using the Debug Log • The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the debug information to be saved. 4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857 Save Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2"...
  • Page 636 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Example 2: To Specify an SC Code Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670. •...
  • Page 637 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Using the Debug Log The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers (The initials in parentheses indicate the names of the modules). 4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10 Key No. Copy Printer Scanner 2222 (SCS) 14000 (SRM) 256 (IMH) 1000 (ECS)

  • Page 638: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd

    SD card. 3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.

  • Page 639: Debug Log Codes

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Using the Debug Log Debug Log Codes SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot.

  • Page 640: Card Save Function

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance Card Save Function Overview Card Save: • The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
  • Page 641 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Card Save Function 6. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings" and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the "#" button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save option will appear in the "List/Test Print"...
  • Page 642 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance 10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add) or Card Save (New). 11. Press "OK" and then exit the "User Tools/Counter" menu. 12. Press the "Printer" button. 13.

  • Page 643: Error Messages

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Card Save Function 15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful. 16.
  • Page 644 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 5. System Maintenance CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 645: Troubleshooting

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting SC Tables Service Call Conditions Summary The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.
  • Page 646 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting • If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors. SC Code Classification The table shows the classification of the SC codes: Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 100 - Scanner...
  • Page 647 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 500 - Paper feed Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex 520 - Paper transport 530 - Fan motor 540 - Fusing Paper feed / Fusing 560 - Others 570 - Unique for a specific model...

  • Page 648: Sc1Xx: Scanning

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Exposure lamp error The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the shading plate. • Exposure lamp defective • Lamp stabilizer defective •...
  • Page 649 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Scanner home position error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "ON" condition during operation. • Scanner motor driver defective • Scanner motor defective • Harness between SBU and scanner motor disconnected •...
  • Page 650 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) White level detection error The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control. • Dirty exposure glass or optics section • SBU defective • Exposure lamp defective •...
  • Page 651 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the IPU is detected. • Defective IPU • Defective connection between IPU and SBU 1. Check the connection between IPU and SBU. 2.

  • Page 652: Sc 2Xx: Exposure

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting SC 2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within the specified time after turning on or changing speed •...
  • Page 653 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error The SCRDY_N signal goes HIGH (inactive) while the laser diode is firing. • Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board •...
  • Page 654 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE ON error: K The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position [K]. • Defective ASIC (Lupus) •...
  • Page 655 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE ON error: M The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position [M]. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE OFF error: M...

  • Page 656: Sc3Xx: Image Processing - 1

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The BCU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialization. • Worn-out LD • Disconnected or broken harness of the LD 1.

  • Page 657: Sc3Xx: Image Processing - 2

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Charge P.P. output error [Y] The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.3 V or less for 0.2 seconds after the charge AC has turned on. •...
  • Page 658 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value (default: 4.7V) with SP3020-002 for twenty counts. • The [Vt - Vtref] value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value (default: 5.0V) with SP3020-001.
  • Page 659 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor adjustment error: C TD sensor adjustment error: Y During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value with SP3238-001 to -004 (default: 2.5V) ±...

  • Page 660: Sc4Xx: Image Processing - 3

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor for 2 seconds after the drum/development motor turned on. • Overload on the drum/development motor • Defective drum/development motor •...
  • Page 661 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Image transfer belt contact motor error The image transfer belt contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates. • Dirty image transfer belt contact sensor •...
  • Page 662 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper transfer unit contact error The paper transfer unit contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates. • Defective paper transfer unit contact sensor •...
  • Page 663 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) High voltage power: Drum/ development bias output error An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum or development. • High voltage leak • Broken harness •...

  • Page 664: Sc5Xx: Paper Feed And Fusing

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Toner collection motor error The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is not set for one second when the toner collection motor is turned off. • Toner collection motor damaged •...
  • Page 665 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The paper lift sensor did not activate within 18 sec. after the tray lift motor switched • An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the motor drive and caused an overload.
  • Page 666 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Laser unit fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected. • Defective laser unit fan • Disconnected or defective harness •...
  • Page 667 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing rear fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected. • Defective fusing rear fan • Disconnected or defective harness •...
  • Page 668 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Toner supply fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected. • Defective toner supply fan • Disconnected or defective harness •...
  • Page 669 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error 1 • The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds. • The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the ready temperature for 90 seconds.
  • Page 670 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (hardware error) During stand-by mode or a print job, the temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile reaches 250 °C. • Defective PSU •...
  • Page 671 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross error • The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power. • The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
  • Page 672 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error 2 • The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds. • The temperature at the end of the heating roller does not reach the ready temperature for 89 seconds .
  • Page 673 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller lamp consecutive full power 2 The heating roller-fusing lamp stays ON for 15 seconds or more while the fusing unit is in the ready condition. • Broken heating roller fusing lamp 1.
  • Page 674 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller thermistor error The temperature detected by the pressure roller thermistor does not reach 0 °C for 20 seconds. • Loose connection of the pressure roller thermistor •...

  • Page 675: Sc6Xx: Device Communication

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller overheat (hardware error) The temperature detected by the pressure roller thermistor detects 250°C or more. • Defective PSU • Defective IPU • Defective BCU • Defective fusing control system 1.
  • Page 676 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) This SC is only for NA models. The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set to "1". • Disconnected mechanical counter • Defective mechanical counter Check or replace the mechanical counter.
  • Page 677 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) While the BCU communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is displayed if one of following conditions occurs. • The IPU receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
  • Page 678 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 1 After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 ms. •...
  • Page 679 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 4 A backup battery error was returned by the counter device. • Counter device control board defective • Backup battery of counter device defective Replace the counter device. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD Card Error...
  • Page 680 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) BCU control data transfer abnormal A sampling of the control data sent from the BCU reveals an abnormality. • Controller board defective • External noise • BCU board defective 1.
  • Page 681 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Incorrect dial up connection -001: Program parameter error -002: Program execution error An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to call the center with a dial up connection. •...
  • Page 682 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Remote service ID2 incorrect error The ID2 in the NVRAM on the controller board is incorrect. • ID2 is not exactly 17 bytes. • ID2 includes text which cannot be printed. •...
  • Page 683 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) RFID: Communication error • Communication error occurs when the RFID starts to communicate with the RFID receptor. • Retry of RFID communication fails three times after the machine has detected the RFID communication error.
  • Page 684 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Memory address command error The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the controller 120 seconds after paper is in the position for registration. • Loose connection •...

  • Page 685: Sc7Xx: Peripherals

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher jogger motor error The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor output does not change within the specified number of pulses. The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 686 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher tray shift motor error (with the side tray installed) The shift roller HP sensor of the upper tray does not activate within the prescribed time after the shift tray starts to move toward or away from the home position. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 687 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher tray lift motor error (with the side tray installed) • Motor overload • Loose connection of the tray lift motor • Defective tray lift motor 1. Check the connections to the tray lift motor. 2.
  • Page 688 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher exit guide plate motor error • Motor overload • Loose connection of the exit guide plate motor • Defective exit guide plate motor 1. Check the connections to the exit guide plate motor. 2.

  • Page 689: Sc8Xx: Overall System

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Energy saving I/O sub-system error The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error. • Controller board defective Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fatal kernel error Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing.
  • Page 690 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI [0F30] configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked. [0F31] Replace the BCU. •...
  • Page 691 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Wireless LAN card not detected The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is established, though the wireless LAN board is detected. • Loose connection Check the connection. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card not detected...
  • Page 692 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Encryption unit error 1 A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit. Encryption key acquisition error: The controller fails to get a new encryption key. •...
  • Page 693 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Encryption unit error 2 A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit. HDD check error: The HDD is not correctly installed.
  • Page 694 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Reboot error The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to the HDD. • Loose connection • Defective cables • Defective HDD •...
  • Page 695 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Access error An error is detected while operating the HDD. • Defective HDD Replace the HDD. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card authentication error A correct license is not found in the SD card.
  • Page 696 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card access error • -13 to -3: File system error • Other number: Device error An error report is sent from the SD card reader. • An error is detected in the SD card. •...
  • Page 697 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD mail data error An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization. • Defective HDD • Power failure during an access to the HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. 2.
  • Page 698 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Delete All error 2: Data area An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted logically by the Security & Encryption Unit. • The logical format for the HDD fails. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
  • Page 699 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Log Data Error 5 • Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine -005 1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD. 2. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 99 -099 •...
  • Page 700 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) File format converter error The file format converter does not respond. • Defective file format converter Replace the file format converter. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Management area error This is a software error than can occur: •...

  • Page 701: Sc9Xx: Miscellaneous

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables SC9xx: Miscellaneous Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Electric counter error Abnormal data in the counters. • Defective NVRAM • Defective controller 1. Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller. 2. Replace the NVRAM. 3.
  • Page 702 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Printer font error A necessary font is not found in the SD card. • A necessary font is not found in the SD card. • The SD card data is corrupted. Check that the SD card has the correct data.
  • Page 703 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Software continuity error The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation. However, unlike SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the software. • Software program error •...
  • Page 704 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) CPM setting error • Defective NVRAM • Defective controller -002 1. Update the controller firmware. 2. Install a new NVRAM, and turn off and on the main power switch after SC995-002 has occurred.
  • Page 705 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Application start error No applications start within 60 seconds after the power is turned on. • Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM • Defective controller • Software problem 1. Check the setting of SP5875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it to "0 (OFF)".

  • Page 706: Process Control Error Conditions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Process Control Error Conditions Developer Initialization Result SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result) Result Description Possible Causes/Action Successfully Developer initialization is completed successfully completed. • A cover was opened or the main switch was turned off during the initialization. 1.

  • Page 707: Process Control Self-Check Result

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Process Control Error Conditions • The machine starts developer initialization after you set "Enable" in SP3-902-005, 006, 007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the front door or turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs. Process Control Self-Check Result Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check.
  • Page 708 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action When the K5 is more than ID sensor the value of • ID sensor pattern density is too high or low. coefficient (K5) SP3-362-003 or less • ID sensor or shutter is defective. maximum/ than the value of Same as 53...

  • Page 709: Line Position Adjustment Result

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Process Control Error Conditions Vsg Adjustment Result SP3-325-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result) No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action Vsg adjustment is correctly done. • Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or foreign material) • Dirty transfer belt • Scratched image transfer belt •...
  • Page 710 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Result Description Note Not done Line position adjustment has not been done. Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been done, successfully Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for line position See Note patterns adjustment.

  • Page 711: Troubleshooting Guide

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Troubleshooting Guide Troubleshooting Guide Line Position Adjustment When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows. Test 1. Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment). 2. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed successfully, 1: Not completed).
  • Page 712 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Defective image processing unit • Low density of test pattern • Defective BCU White image, Abnormal image, Low 1. Replace the high voltage power supply unit. density 2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx).
  • Page 713 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Defective ID sensor at center • Deformed center area on the image transfer belt The main scan registration is shifted by • Defective BCU more than ±0.66 mm, but only at the 1.
  • Page 714 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure White image, Abnormal image, • Defective laser optics housing unit shutter Low density • Defective image processing unit • Low density of test pattern • Defective BCU 1. Replace the shutter motor. 2.
  • Page 715 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y • No defective component are shifted by more than ±1.4mm from • Defective image transfer belt the sub scan registration of K. •...
  • Page 716 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The main scan registration of K is • Abnormal SP setting value of main scan: K shifted. Adjust the value with SP2-101-001. The main scan length of K is shifted. •...

  • Page 717: Problem At Regular Intervals

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y • Defective image transfer belt are shifted. • Defective drive units • Defective ID sensor • Defective BCU • Incorrect SP value 1.
  • Page 718 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting [A]: Paper feed direction [B]: Problems at regular intervals • Abnormal image at 35-mm intervals: Charge roller • Abnormal image at 795-mm intervals: Image transfer belt unit • Colored spots at 41-mm intervals: Image transfer roller •...

  • Page 719: Blank Print

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Troubleshooting Guide Blank Print Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Defective laser unit Replace the laser unit. Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. Replace the image transfer belt Defective image transfer belt unit unit. No image is printed. Incorrect action of paper transfer Check the guide and the paper roller transfer roller.

  • Page 720: Missing Cmy Color

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Missing CMY Color Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. Loose connection between Replace the drum positioning printer cartridge and BCU cover. C, M, or Y is missing. Image transfer belt not Check the belt tension unit.

  • Page 721: Dark Vertical Line On Prints

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Troubleshooting Guide Interval Possible cause Necessary actions At intervals of 35 mm (1.38 Defective charge roller Replace the PCDU. inches) At intervals of 33 mm (1.3 inches) Defective development roller Replace the PCDU. At intervals of 83 mm (3.27 Replace the paper transfer Defective paper transfer roller inches)

  • Page 722: White Horizontal Lines Or Bands

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting White Horizontal Lines or Bands Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. White lines or bands appear in Replace the image transfer belt Defective image transfer belt unit images of all toner colors. unit.

  • Page 723: Partial Cmy Color Dots

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Troubleshooting Guide Partial CMY Color Dots Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU. Unexpected dots of the same Replace the image transfer belt color appear at irregular Defective image transfer belt unit unit. intervals. Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.

  • Page 724: Unfused Or Partially Fused Prints

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Unfused or Partially Fused Prints Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Non-standard paper in use Use recommended paper. Some parts of images are not Select an appropriate media Incorrect media type mode fused very well. mode. Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.

  • Page 725: Background Stain

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Troubleshooting Guide Background Stain Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Unclean paper transfer roller Clean the paper transfer roller. Unclean paper path Clean the paper path. The reverse side of the paper is not clean. Unclean registration roller Clean the registration roller.

  • Page 726: Jam Detection

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Jam Detection Paper Jam Display SP7-507 shows the paper jam history. • CODE: Indicates the jam code. • SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code. • TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001). • DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred. Jam Codes and Display Codes SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.
  • Page 727 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Jam Detection Jam Code SP Display Description Display Vertical transport sensor 3 or relay sensor does 7504 13 Bank Transport 2: ON not detect paper from tray 3. Vertical transport sensor 3 or relay sensor does 7504 14 Bank Transport 3: ON not detect paper from tray 4.
  • Page 728 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Jam Code SP Display Description Display Bank Vertical Transport 7504 54 Vertical transport sensor 3 does not turn off. Sensor 3 7504 57 Regist Sensor Registration sensor does not turn off. 7504 60 Exit Sensor Paper exit sensor does not turn off.
  • Page 729 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Jam Detection Jam Code SP Display Description Display Gathering roller HP sensor does not turn off after the jogger fence has moved from its home position. Finisher Gathering Roller 7504 245 Motor Gathering roller HP sensor does not turn on after the jogger fence has returned to its home position.
  • Page 730 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size A5 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF HLT LEF LT SEF A4 SEF HLT SEF A5 SEF Others CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 731: Electrical Component Defects

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Component Defects Electrical Component Defects Sensors Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. Open Drum Phase Sensor CN1/2 SC381 (CMY) Shorted Open Drum Phase Sensor (K) CN107/2 SC380 Shorted Toner End Sensor (K) CN115/18 Toner end cannot be Open...
  • Page 732 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. "Cover Open" is Open displayed Right Door Sensor CN104/1 "Right cover open" Shorted cannot be detected. Waste Toner near full is Open indicated. Waste Toner Bottle Full CN118/19 Sensor...
  • Page 733 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. Paper overflow is Open detected. Paper Overflow CN104/9 Sensor Paper overflow is not Shorted detected. • Paper is not detected. Open • Jam C Paper Exit Sensor CN104/6 •...
  • Page 734 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. Open Paper is not detected. Paper Feed Sensor CN129/4 • Paper is detected. Shorted • Jam A • Paper is not detected. Open Vertical Transport •...
  • Page 735 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ CN No./ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Pin No. • Paper is not detected. Open • Jam Z Duplex Exit Sensor CN126/A11 • Paper is detected. Short • Jam Z • Paper end is not detected.

  • Page 736: Blown Fuse Conditions

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting Blown Fuse Conditions Power Supply Unit Rating Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch 120V-127V 220V-240V • 24V power to the BCU and IPU not supplied. 8A/125V 8A/125V • 24VS2 power to the BCU not supplied. •...

  • Page 737: Scanner Test Mode

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Scanner Test Mode Scanner Test Mode SBU Test Mode Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control operates correctly. The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key. •...
  • Page 738 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 6. Troubleshooting CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 739: Energy Saving

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 7. Energy Saving Energy Save Energy Saver Modes Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.

  • Page 740: Energy Save Effectiveness

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 7. Energy Saving Normally, Panel Off timer < Energy Saver timer < Auto Off timer. But, for example, if Auto Off timer < or = Panel Off timer and Energy Saver timer, the machine goes immediately to Off mode when the Auto Off timer expires.
  • Page 741 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Energy Save • 8941-002: Standby mode • 8941-003: Panel off mode • 8941-004: Low power mode • 8941-005: Sleep mode With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount of energy that is used by the machine.
  • Page 742 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 7. Energy Saving Sleep 005: Off Mode Time 508776.0 520377.0 193.35 0.35 Total 17.47 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 743: Paper Save

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Paper Save Paper Save Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment. 1. Duplex: Reduce paper volume in half! 2.
  • Page 744 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 7. Energy Saving To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter. The total counter counts all pages printed. • For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2. • For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3. The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
  • Page 745 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Model Z-C1 Machine Codes: M022/M024/M026/M028 Appendices 19 Nov, 2010 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 746 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...
  • Page 747 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Appendix: Specifications Specifications..............................3 General Specifications...........................3 Supported Paper Sizes............................7 Software Accessories............................9 Printer Drivers..............................9 Optional Equipment............................10 Paper Feed Unit (M367)..........................10 Paper Feed Unit (M368)..........................10 1-bin Tray Unit (M370)..........................11 Utility Software.............................11 2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables............................13 Preventive Maintenance Items........................13 Other Yield Parts............................15...
  • Page 748 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Input Check Table.............................380 Output Check Table..........................386 Printer Service Mode.............................393 SP1-XXX (Service Mode)..........................393 Scanner Service Mode..........................402 SP1-xxx (System and Others)........................402 SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)......................403 Test Pattern Printing............................405 INDEX ................................407 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 749: Appendix: Specifications

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Appendix: Specifications Specifications General Specifications Mainframe Configuration: Desktop Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing Print Process: 4 drums tandem method C1a: 32 cpm (LT), 30 cpm (A4) Copy Speed: C1b: 42 cpm (LT), 40 cpm (A4) Color: 15 seconds or less (A4, LT, SEF) First Copy Time:...
  • Page 750 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Appendix: Specifications Standard tray: 52-220 g/m (14-59 lb) By-pass tray: 52-256 g/m (14-69 lb) Printing Paper Weight: Optional paper feed tray: 52-220 g/m (14-59 lb) Duplex: 60-163 g/m (16-44 lb) Basic model: Up to 500 sheets (A4/ LT/ 80 g/m / 20 lb) Output Paper Capacity: Finisher model: Up to 250 sheets (LG)
  • Page 751 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Specifications PCL5c: 600 x 600 dpi (1, 2, 4 bit), 300 x 300 dpi Grayscale PCL-6: 1200 x 1200 dpi (1 bit), 600 x 600 dpi (1, 2, 4 bit) Resolution: PS3: 1200 x 1200 dpi (1 bit), 600 x 600 dpi (1, 2, 4 bit) XPS: 1200 x 1200 dpi (1 bit), 600 x 600 dpi (1, 2, 4 bit) PCL5c/ 6:...
  • Page 752 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Appendix: Specifications ARDF Size A4 to A5, LG to HLT Simplex Weight 52 to 128 g/m (14 to 34 lb.) Paper Size/Weight: Size A4 to A5, LG to HLT Duplex Weight 60 to 105 g/m (17 to 28 lb.) Table Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m , 20 lb.)

  • Page 753: Supported Paper Sizes

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Supported Paper Sizes Supported Paper Sizes Main Tray By-pass Tray Paper Size (W x L) Duplex A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Letter SEF...
  • Page 754 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Appendix: Specifications Main Tray By-pass Tray Paper Size (W x L) Duplex C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Y: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Y#: Supported: the user specifies the paper size. N: Not supported CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 755: Software Accessories

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Software Accessories Software Accessories The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to select which components to install. Printer Drivers Printer Windows 2000 Windows XP Vista Macintosh Language PCL 5c/6 •...

  • Page 756: Optional Equipment

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Appendix: Specifications Optional Equipment Paper Feed Unit (M367) Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty) Capacity: 550 sheets Paper Weight: 52 to 256 g/m (14 to 68 lb.) Paper Size: A5/HLT to A4/LG SEF Power Source:...

  • Page 757: 1-Bin Tray Unit (M370)

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Optional Equipment 1-bin Tray Unit (M370) Paper Size: A6/HLT to A4/LG SEF Paper Weight: 52 to 220 g/m , 14 to 58 lb. Tray Capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame) Power Consumption: Less than 11 W Weight:...
  • Page 758 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 1. Appendix: Specifications CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 759: Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables Preventive Maintenance Items Chart: A4 (LT)/5% Mode: 2 copies / original (prints/job) Ratio 25% Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions. Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect Mainframe Item 120K...
  • Page 760 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables Item 120K 180K 240K Remarks Paper Transfer Roller Unit Fusing Fusing Roller Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Oil Supply Roller Cleaning Roller Tension Roller Plain Shaft Bearing Paper Path Registration Roller Damp cloth Registration Sensor Dry cloth Inverter Sensor...

  • Page 761: Other Yield Parts

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Maintenance Tables Item 120K 180K 240K Remarks Waste Toner Bottle Dust Filter Exhaust Filter Dust Glass Other Yield Parts The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O).
  • Page 762 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables Feed Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Friction Pad Damp cloth; alcohol Sensors Blower brush White Plate Dry or damp cloth Transport Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Exit Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Inverter Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Idle Rollers Damp cloth;...
  • Page 763 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA Maintenance Tables Feed Roller Dry cloth Separation Roller Dry cloth Pick-up Roller Dry cloth Relay Roller Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad Damp cloth Sensors Blower brush Side Tray (M369) Items Remarks Rollers Damp cloth Exit Tray Damp cloth Bearing S552R 1 Bin Tray (M370)
  • Page 764 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA...

  • Page 765: Appendix: Sp Mode Tables

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables System SP-xxx SP1-XXX (Feed) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing 1001 for each mode.
  • Page 766 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 017 Duplex:Plain *ENG [–9 to 9 / 3.9 / 0.1 mm/step] 018 Duplex:M-Thick *ENG [–9 to 9 / -0.1 / 0.1 mm/step] 019 Duplex:Thick1 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -2.1 / 0.1 mm/step] 020 Duplex: Thick2 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -3 / 0.1 mm/step]...
  • Page 767 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx 003 Tray1:Thick1 *ENG [-11 to 9 / -3 / 1 mm/step] 004 Tray234:Plain *ENG [-11 to 9 / -1 / 1 mm/step] 005 Tray234:M-Thick *ENG [-11 to 9 / -1 / 1 mm/step] 006 Tray234:Thick1 *ENG [-11 to 9 / -3 / 1 mm/step] 007 By-pass:Plain...
  • Page 768 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 1103 [Fusing Idling] Fusing Idling Adjustment 012 Forced Idling Stop *ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 013 Forced Idling Stop Temp. *ENG [100 to 180 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 014 Minimum Idling Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 2 / 1 sec/step]...
  • Page 769 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx 012 Offset: Feed Start: M-Thick *ENG [0 to 100 / 10/ 1 deg/step] 013 Offset: Feed Start: 600dpi: Plain1: BW *ENG [0 to 100 / 25/ 1 deg/step] 014 Offset: Feed Start: 600dpi: Plain2: BW *ENG [0 to 100 / 25/ 1 deg/step] 030 Offset: Feed Start: Time...
  • Page 770 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Panel Off Mode: P-Roller *ENG [50 to 160 / 120 / 1 deg /step] Specifies the presure roller temperature in the panel off mode. 016 Low Power: Center *ENG Specifies the heating roller temperature (center or ends) in the low power mode.
  • Page 771 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx 038 Thin: FC: Simplex:Center *ENG 039 Thin: FC: Simplex: Ends *ENG 040 Thin:FC:Duplex:Center *ENG 041 Thin:FC:Duplex:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg /step] 042 Thin: BW: Simplex:Center *ENG 043 Thin: BW: Simplex: Ends *ENG 044 Thin: BW: Duplex:Center *ENG...
  • Page 772 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 058 SP 1:FC:Simplex:Center *ENG 059 SP 1:FC:Simplex:Ends *ENG 060 SP 1:FC:Duplex:Center *ENG 061 SP 1:FC:Duplex:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 170 / 1 deg/step] 062 SP 1:BW:Simplex:Center *ENG 063 SP 1:BW:Simplex:Ends *ENG 064 SP 1:BW:Duplex:Center *ENG 065 SP 1: BW: Duplex: Ends...
  • Page 773 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx Target Temp. After Ready *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the target temperature for the maintain mode after the machine has reached the target temperature in warm-up mode. Recovery Target Temp. *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg /step] Specifies the target temperature for the print mode without printing job after the machine's...
  • Page 774 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 120 Plain2: FC: Simplex:Center *ENG 121 Plain2: FC: Simplex:Ends *ENG 122 Plain2: FC: Duplex:Center *ENG 123 Plain2: FC: Duplex:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step] 124 Plain2: BW: Simplex:Center *ENG 125 Plain2: BW: Simplex: Ends *ENG...
  • Page 775 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx 144 Glossy: Plain2:Center *ENG 145 Glossy: Plain2: Ends *ENG 146 Glossy: MThick:Center *ENG 147 Glossy: MThick: Ends *ENG 160 F: Thick1:FC:Simplex:Center *ENG 161 F: Thick1:FC:Simplex:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 135 / 1 deg/step] 162 F: Thick1:BW:Simplex:Center *ENG 163 F: Thick1:BW:Simplex:Ends *ENG...
  • Page 776 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 211 Plain2:Simplex:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 125 / 1 deg/step] 212 F: Plain1:Simplex:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 105 / 1 deg/step] 213 F: Plain2:Simplex:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 110 / 1 deg/step] 214 F: MThick:Simplex: Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 115 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 777 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx 233 F: MThick:Duplex: Press *ENG 234 Glossy: Plain1: Duplex: Press *ENG 235 Glossy: Plain2: Duplex: Press *ENG 236 Glossy: MThick: Duplex: Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 90 / 1 deg/step] 237 F: Thick1:Duplex: Press *ENG 238 F: SP 1:Duplex: Press *ENG...
  • Page 778 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Pre-Idling Time *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001. Stop Time * ENG [5 to 30 / 20 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the time for measuring the nip. 1112 [Envir.
  • Page 779 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx P-Roll Thresh AF Ready *ENG [0 to 160 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for entering the wait time mode (SP1-113-001). P-Roll Thresh AF Job *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for entering the wait time mode (SP1-113-004).
  • Page 780 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Center Temp. 2 [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller (center) when the paper width is 226 mm or more. The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116-019. Ends Temp.
  • Page 781 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx After Job End [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the idling time without the lamp on after job end. This idling prevents the heating roller overheating after job end. 1118 [Curl Correction] Execute Pattern *ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 782 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 to Specifies the additional duty to the heating roller fusing lamp for each paper type. These values are added to the duty decided by the PID control. 001 Plain1: Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %] 002 Plain1: End *ENG...
  • Page 783 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx [FF Correct Time] FF Correct Time *ENG [0 to 60 / 5 / 1 sec] Specifies the FF duty correction time after the fusing/ paper exit motor has started to rotate in each print mode. [FF Control thresh] Specifies the offset temperature for turning off the FF duty correction.
  • Page 784 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Fusing FF Control] Specifies the additional duty to the heating roller fusing lamp for each paper type. These values are added to the duty decided by the PID control. 050 Plain2:Center *ENG [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 %] 051 Plain2: End *ENG...
  • Page 785 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx Feed Condition *ENG [0 or 2 / 0 / 1] Selects the paper feed timing. 0: Productivity priority, 1: Fusing quality priory Note: When the print paper size changes from a small to a large size, you can stop the print job in order to ensure that the fusing temperature is high enough, and then resume it when the proper temperature has been reached.
  • Page 786 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 006 Unit Low Judge Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 65/ 1 deg/step] 007 High: 1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 5 %] 008 High: 2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 5 %] 009 High: 3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 5 %]...
  • Page 787 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx FusingMot (Fusing/ Paper Exit Motor): *ENG [-4 to 4 / -1.85 / 0.1 %] FusingMot (Fusing/ Paper Exit Motor): *ENG FusingMot (Fusing/ Paper Exit Motor): *ENG [-4 to 4 / 1.55 / 0.1 %] 029 Regist:Thick2: Low *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0.7 / 0.1 %] 030 Regist:Thick3: Low...
  • Page 788 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 047 Duplex CW:Plain: Low *ENG 048 Duplex CW:Plain: High *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %] 049 Duplex CW:M-Thick: Low *ENG 050 Duplex CW:M-Thick: High *ENG 051 Duplex CW:Thick1: Low *ENG 052 Duplex CW:Thick1: Middle *ENG...
  • Page 789 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx 069 Reverse CCW:Plain: Low *ENG 070 Reverse CCW:Plain: High *ENG 071 Reverse CCW: M-Thick: Low *ENG 072 Reverse CCW: M-Thick: High *ENG [-4 to 4 / -0 / 0.1 %] 073 Reverse CCW: Thick1: Low *ENG 074 Reverse CCW: Thick1: Middle *ENG...
  • Page 790 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 002 Feed-STM OFF: Plain *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0/ 1 mm/step] 003 Feed-STM ON: Plain *ENG 004 Feed-Solenoid ON: Thick *ENG [-10 to 40 / 0/ 2.5 mm/step] 005 Feed-STM OFF: Thick *ENG 006 Feed-STM ON: Thick *ENG...
  • Page 791 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP-xxx 023 Junction Gate SOL2: ON: Low *ENG 024 Junction Gate SOL2: ON: Middle *ENG 025 Junction Gate SOL2: ON: High *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0/ 1 mm/step] 026 Junction Gate SOL2: OFF: Low *ENG 027 Junction Gate SOL2: OFF: Middle *ENG 028 Junction Gate SOL2: OFF: High...

  • Page 792: System Sp2-Xxx

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables System SP2-xxx SP2-XXX (Drum) [Charge DC V:Fixed] DFU 2005 (Paper Type, Process Speed, Color) Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes. Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;...
  • Page 793 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [Charge AC Current: LL] DFU Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for LL (Color) 2007 Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for LL environment (Low temperature and Low humidity). 001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG 002 Environmental Target: C *ENG...
  • Page 794 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Charge AC Current: MH] DFU Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MH (Color) 2010 Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MH environment (Middle temperature and High humidity). 001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG 002 Environmental Target: C *ENG...
  • Page 795 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx Displays the environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity. [1 to 5 / – / 1 /step] 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m 001 Current Environmental:Display *ENG 2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m 3: MM (11.3 <...
  • Page 796 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the previous environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity. 010 Previous Environmental:Display *ENG [1 to 5 / – / 1 /step] 1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH Displays the previous temperature.
  • Page 797 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 2015 [Charge AC Adj: Result] 001 Bk *ENG 002 C *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 M *ENG 004 Y *ENG [Color Regist Adust] These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted 2101 at the factory.
  • Page 798 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Main Mag.: Bk:Standard Spd *ENG 002 Main Mag.: Bk:Middle Spd *ENG 003 Main Mag.: Bk:Low Spd *ENG 004 Main Mag.: C: Standard Spd *ENG 005 Main Mag.: C: Middle Spd *ENG 006 Main Mag.: C:Low Spd *ENG [0 to 408 / 204 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 799 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 003 Left *ENG [0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step] 004 Right *ENG [LD Initial Power Adjust] 2104 Adjusts the LD initial power. These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed. 001 LD1: K *ENG 002 LD2: K...
  • Page 800 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Bk: Standard Speed *ENG 002 C: Standard Speed *ENG 003 M: Standard Speed *ENG 004 Y: Standard Speed *ENG 005 Bk: Middle Speed *ENG [50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step] Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on 006 C: Middle Speed *ENG...
  • Page 801 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx Pattern Selection [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step] 0 None 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 13. Independent Pattern (4dot) 2: Vertical Line (2dot) 14. Trimming Area 3: Horizontal (1dot) 15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical) 4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal) 5: Grid Vertical Line...
  • Page 802 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Executes the rough line position adjustment once. After doing this SP, make sure to execute 003 Execute:Mode c SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line position adjustment is not perfectly done. 004 Execute:Mode d Rough adjustment and fine adjustment, once each.
  • Page 803 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [ID Sensor Check Result] Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check. 2140 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 PWM: Bk *ENG 002 PWM: C *ENG 003 PWM: M *ENG...
  • Page 804 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Maximum: Bk *ENG 002 Maximum: C *ENG 003 Maximum: M *ENG 004 Maximum: Y *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 005 Maximum: Front *ENG 006 Maximum: Center *ENG 007 Maximum: Rear *ENG [ID Sensor Check Result] Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check.
  • Page 805 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 001 Maximum 2: Bk *ENG 002 Maximum 2: C *ENG 003 Maximum 2: M *ENG 004 Maximum 2: Y *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 005 Maximum 2: Front *ENG 006 Maximum 2: Center *ENG 007 Maximum 2: Rear *ENG...
  • Page 806 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 029 Area 2: Bk: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / -193 / 1sub-dot/step] 030 Area 3: Bk: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 58 / 1sub-dot/step] 031 Area 4: Bk: LD1 *ENG 032 Area 5: Bk: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 143 / 1sub-dot/step]...
  • Page 807 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 081 Area 2: C: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / -195 / 1sub-dot/step] 082 Area 3: C: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 56 / 1sub-dot/step] 083 Area 4: C: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 57 / 1sub-dot/step] 084 Area 5: C: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 143 / 1sub-dot/step]...
  • Page 808 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 133 Area 2: M: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / -192 / 1sub-dot/step] 134 Area 3: M: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 60 / 1sub-dot/step] 135 Area 4: M: LD1 *ENG 136 Area 5: M: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 142 / 1sub-dot/step]...
  • Page 809 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 185 Area 2: Y: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / -194 / 1sub-dot/step] 186 Area 3: Y: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 60 / 1sub-dot/step] 187 Area 4: Y: LD1 *ENG 188 Area 5: Y: LD1 *ENG [-255 to 255 / 144 / 1sub-dot/step] 189 Area 6: Y: LD1...
  • Page 810 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Shading Correct Setting] FA Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power. The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited from area 1 to area 14. 2152 For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
  • Page 811 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 020 Area 3: Bk: LD2 *ENG [50 to 150 / 97.9 / 0.1 %/step] 021 Area 4: Bk: LD2 *ENG [50 to 150 / 98 / 0.1 %/step] 022 Area 5: Bk: LD2 *ENG [50 to 150 / 99 / 0.1 %/step] 023 Area 6: Bk: LD2 *ENG [50 to 150 / 99.9 / 0.1 %/step]...
  • Page 812 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 046 Area 13: C: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 104.6 / 0.1 %/step] 047 Area 14: C: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 105.6 / 0.1 %/step] 048 Area 15: C: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 96.4 / 0.1 %/step] 049 Area 0: C: LD2...
  • Page 813 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 072 Area 7: M: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 100.3 / 0.1 %/step] 073 Area 8: M: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 100.2 / 0.1 %/step] 074 Area 9: M: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 100.3 / 0.1 %/step] 075 Area 10: M: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1 %/step]...
  • Page 814 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 098 Area 1: Y: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 98.9 / 0.1 %/step] 099 Area 2: Y: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 98.4 / 0.1 %/step] 100 Area 3: Y: LD1 *ENG [50 to 150 / 98.1 / 0.1 %/step] 101 Area 4: Y: LD1...
  • Page 815 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 124 Area 11: Y: LD2 *ENG [50 to 150 / 99.4 / 0.1 %/step] 125 Area 12: Y: LD2 *ENG [50 to 150 / 98.9 / 0.1 %/step] 126 Area 13: Y: LD2 *ENG [50 to 150 / 98.7 / 0.1 %/step] 127 Area 14: Y: LD2 *ENG [50 to 150 / 97.7 / 0.1 %/step]...
  • Page 816 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the values for each correction. • "Paper Int. Mag: Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value between two sheets of paper. • "Mag.Cor. Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value. • "M. Scan Erro." indicates the shift correction value in the main scan direction. •...
  • Page 817 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 023 M. Scan Shift: Left: M *ENG 024 M. Scan Shift: Center: M *ENG [–16000 to 16000 / 0 / 0.001 um/step] 025 M. Scan Shift: Right: M *ENG 026 S. Scan Shift: Left: M *ENG 027 S.
  • Page 818 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 051 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG [–1020 to 1020 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 052 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG 053 S. Cor.: 600 Line: Y *ENG [–800 to 800 / 0 / 1 line/step] 054 S.
  • Page 819 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 013 M. Scan: Middle: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 014 M. Scan: Low: Dot: M *ENG [-511 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 015 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 016 M.
  • Page 820 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 039 S. Scan: Low: SubLine: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line] 2190 [Line Pos. Adj. Setting] DFU 001 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: Bk *ENG 002 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean/step] 003 Paper Int.
  • Page 821 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 008 ch 0: Filter: Rear: b0 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step] 009 ch 0: Filter: Rear: b1 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 168 / 1 bit/step] 010 ch 0: Filter: Rear: b2 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step] 011 ch 1: Filter: Front: a1...
  • Page 822 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [MUSIC Thresh Setting] DFU 2192 Line Position Adjustment: Threshold Setting ch 0: ID sensor at rear, ch 1: ID sensor at center, ch 2: ID sensor at front 001 ch 0: 1st *ENG 002 ch 0: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 823 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode during jobs. Page: Standby: BW *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand-by mode.
  • Page 824 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Page: Full Color Job Before: BW *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step] 015 Page: Full Color Job Before: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step] 016 Page: Power ON:BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step] 2194...
  • Page 825 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 2198 [Music A/D Interval] DFU 001 ADC Trigger *ENG [7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 s/step] 2199 [Music Error Time Setting] DFU 001 Error Detection Counter *ENG [0.1 to 9.9 / 3 / 0.1 sec /step] [Skew Origin Set] 2220 Resets the value of the skew adjustment motor for each color.
  • Page 826 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 003 Absolute Humidity [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m /step] [Env. Correct:Transfer] DFU 2302 Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit 001 Current Environmental Display *ENG Forced Setting *ENG [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step] Sets the environment condition manually.
  • Page 827 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [0 to 250 / 194 / 1 mm/step] 001 Threshold 1 *ENG Threshold 1 ≤ paper: Paper is detected as "S1" size. [0 to 250 / 165 / 1 mm/step] 002 Threshold 2 *ENG Threshold 2 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 1: Paper is detected as "S2"...
  • Page 828 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Positive:after JAM *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 10 V/step] Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller. 004 Negative:after JAM *ENG [10 to 995 / 100 / 10 %/step] [Common: BW: Bias] 2351 Image Transfer Belt: B/W: Bias Adjustment...
  • Page 829 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx Image Transfer: Middle Spd:C *ENG [0 to 80 / 15 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for M-Thick paper. Image Transfer: Middle Spd:M *ENG [0 to 80 / 15 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for M-Thick paper.
  • Page 830 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 009 Image Transfer: Middle Spd:C *ENG [1 to 100 / 54 / 1 /step] 010 Image Transfer: Middle Spd:M *ENG [1 to 100 / 54 / 1 /step] 011 Image Transfer: Middle Spd:Y *ENG [1 to 100 / 55 / 1 /step] 012 Image Transfer: Low Spd:Bk...
  • Page 831 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 40 / 1 – A /step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 21 / 1 – A /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1 –...
  • Page 832 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 390 / 5%/step] 012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 833 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 834 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 19 / 1/step] 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S1 *ENG S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 14 / 1/step] 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S1 *ENG S1 size ≥...
  • Page 835 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 3 / 1/step] 012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 19 / 1/step] 013 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 836 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 35 / 1/step] 007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 33 / 1/step] 008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 837 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [Plain1:L-Edge Correction] DFU Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values. 2421 Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec •...
  • Page 838 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Plain1: T-Edge Correction] DFU Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values. 2423 Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec •...
  • Page 839 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 2425 [HH-Small: L-Edge Correction] 001 Paper Transfer: Standard & Low: 1 *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5 %/step] 002 Paper Transfer: Standard & Low: 2 *ENG 2430 [Plain1: Env. Correct Table] DFU 013 Separation DC: Standard: 1st *ENG 014 Separation DC: Standard: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 840 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 002 Paper Transfer: Standard Spd: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 23 / 1 - A /step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low Spd: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 15 / 1 - A /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low Spd: 2nd *ENG [Plain2: Bias: FC]...
  • Page 841 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 200 / 5 %/step] 008 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 135 / 5 %/step] 009 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 842 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S1 *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5 %/step] S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S1 *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S1 *ENG...
  • Page 843 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 330 / 5 %/step] 014 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2Side: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 220 / 5 %/step] 015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 844 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 8 / 1 /step] 011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 4 / 1 /step] 012 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 845 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 38 / 1 /step] 006 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2Side: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 35 / 1 /step] 007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 846 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Plain2: LE Correct] DFU Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2440 and SP2441 are multiplied by these SP values. 2446 Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec •...
  • Page 847 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [Plain2: TE Correct] DFU Plain2 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2440 and SP2441 are multiplied by these SP values. 2448 Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec •...
  • Page 848 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 2450 [Plain2: Env Correct Table] 013 Separation DC: Standard: 1st *ENG 014 Separation DC: Standard: 2nd *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step] 015 Separation DC: Low: 1st *ENG 016 Separation DC: Low: 2nd *ENG [Plain2: Env Correct Edge] 017 Separation DC: Standard: 1st...
  • Page 849 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [Thin: Paper Size Correction] DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 2461 SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values. Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step] 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S1 *ENG...
  • Page 850 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step] S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S1 *ENG 005 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5% /step] 194 mm >...
  • Page 851 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 21 / 1 /step] 011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 16 / 1 /step] 013 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 852 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 26 / 1 /step] 015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [Thin: L-Edge Correction] DFU Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode.
  • Page 853 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [Thin: T-Edge Correct] DFU Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values. 2473 Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec •...
  • Page 854 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Thick1: Bias] 2501 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper. Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 001 Separation DC: Middle Spd: 1st *ENG 002 Separation DC: Middle Spd: 2nd *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V / step]...
  • Page 855 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Middle: 1st: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) 002 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2nd: S1 *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size ≥...
  • Page 856 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] 014 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2nd: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 857 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 270 / 5%/step] 010 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2nd: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 858 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 20 / 1/step] 005 Paper Transfer: Middle: 1st: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 19 / 1/step] 006 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2nd: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 859 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 23 / 1/step] 016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [Thick1:Size-Env.Correct:FC] DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper 2514 size.
  • Page 860 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 31 / 1/step] 010 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2nd: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 13 / 1/step] 011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 861 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Middle: 1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Separation DC: Middle: 1st *ENG 006 Separation DC: Middle: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 862 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Thick 1: T-Edge Correct] DFU Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values. 2523 Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec •...
  • Page 863 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 2530 [Thick 1: Env. Correct Table] DFU 013 Separation DC: Middle: 1st *ENG 014 Separation DC: Middle: 2nd *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step] 015 Separation DC: Low: 1st *ENG 016 Separation DC: Low: 2nd *ENG [Thick 1: Edge-Env.
  • Page 864 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Thick 2: Size Correction: BW] 2561 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values. [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step] 003 Paper Transfer: 1: S1 *ENG S1 size ≥...
  • Page 865 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 150 / 5% /step] 007 Paper Transfer: 1: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 160 / 5% /step] 008 Paper Transfer: 2: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 866 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 18 / 1 /step] 011 Paper Transfer: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step] 012 Paper Transfer: 2: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 867 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 13 / 1 /step] 015 Paper Transfer: 1: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 38 / 1 /step] 016 Paper Transfer: 2: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [Thick 2: L-Edge Correct] DFU Thick 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each...
  • Page 868 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 003 Separation DC: 1st *ENG 004 Separation DC: 2nd *ENG [Thick2:Switch Timing T-Edge] DFU 2574 Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
  • Page 869 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [OHP: Bias: FC] 2608 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 230 / 21 / 1 – A /step] [OHP: Size Correction: BW] 2611 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
  • Page 870 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 995 / 200 / 5% /step] 015 Paper Transfer: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [OHP: Size-Env. Correct: BW] DFU 2613 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values.
  • Page 871 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [OHP: L-Edge Correct] DFU OHP: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each 2621 mode. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values. •...
  • Page 872 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 2630 [OHP: Env. Correct Table] DFU 015 Separation DC *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step] 019 Separation DC *ENG [Thick3: Bias] 2647 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick paper 3. 001 Separation DC: 1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step]...
  • Page 873 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step] 004 Paper Transfer: 2: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 874 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer: 2: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [Thick 3: Size Env. Correct: BW] DFU 2652 Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size.
  • Page 875 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 27 / 1 /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2: S1 *ENG S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step] 003 Paper Transfer: 1: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 876 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Thick 3: Switch Timing: L-Edge] DFU 2655 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd...
  • Page 877 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 015 Separation DC: 1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step] 016 Separation DC: 2nd *ENG [Thick 3: Edge-Env. Correct] DFU 019 Separation DC: 1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step] 020 Separation DC: 2nd *ENG [M-Thick: Bias]...
  • Page 878 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 14 / 1- A /step] [M-Thick: Size Correct: BW] DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 2713 SP2703 and SP2707 are multiplied by these SP values.
  • Page 879 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 390 / 5%/step] 012 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 220 / 5%/step] 013 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 880 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 881 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 13 / 1 /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2Side: S1 *ENG S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 /step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S1 *ENG S1 size ≥...
  • Page 882 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 14 / 1 /step] 013 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 13 / 1 /step] 014 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2Side: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 883 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 12 / 1 /step] 008 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 1 / 1 /step] 009 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1Side: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 884 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Paper Transfer: Standard:1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Standard:2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step] 005 Separation DC: Standard: 1st *ENG 006 Separation DC: Standard: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 885 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Standard:1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Standard:2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step] 005 Separation DC: Standard: 1st *ENG 006 Separation DC: Standard: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 886 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 013 Separation DC: Standard: 1st *ENG 014 Separation DC: Standard: 2nd *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step] 015 Separation DC: Low: 1st *ENG 016 Separation DC: Low: 2nd *ENG [M-Thick:Edge-Env.Correct] DFU 017 Separation DC: Standard: 1st *ENG...
  • Page 887 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [SP 1: Bias: FC] 2757 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode. Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 35 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 25 / 1 –...
  • Page 888 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 390 / 5%/step] 010 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 889 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 006 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 890 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 995 / 330 / 5%/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [SP1:Size Env.Correct:BW] DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper 2763 size.
  • Page 891 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 5 / 1 /step] 010 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 /step] 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 892 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 1 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 42 / 1 /step] 006 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 893 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 41 / 1 /step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [SP1: L-Edge Correct] DFU Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode.
  • Page 894 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 005 Separation DC: Standard: 1st *ENG 006 Separation DC: Standard: 2nd...
  • Page 895 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [SP 1: Switch Timing:T-Edge] DFU Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the 2774 paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Standard: 1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Standard: 2nd...
  • Page 896 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Separation DC: Middle Spd: 1st *ENG 002 Separation DC: Middle Spd: 2nd *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step] 003 Separation DC: Low Spd: 1st *ENG 004 Separation DC: Low Spd: 2nd *ENG [SP 2: Bias: BW] 2803...
  • Page 897 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Middle: 1Side: S1 *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S1 *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 898 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step] 014 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2Side: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step] 015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 899 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [100 to 995 / 270 / 5%/step] 010 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2Side: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 900 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 20 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer: Middle: 1Side: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 19 / 1 /step] 006 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2Side: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 901 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 23 / 1 /step] 016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S4 *ENG 139 mm > S4 (Paper width) [SP 2: Size Env. Correct: FC] DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 2814 SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values.
  • Page 902 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 31 / 1 /step] 010 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2Side: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 13 / 1 /step] 011 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 903 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Middle: 1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Middle: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Separation DC: Middle: 1st *ENG 006 Separation DC: Middle: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 904 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [SP 2: T-Edge Correct] DFU Special 2 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values. 2823 Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec •...
  • Page 905 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [SP 2: Env. Correct Table] DFU 2830 Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 013 Separation DC: Middle: 1st *ENG 014 Separation DC: Middle: 2nd *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step] 015 Separation DC: Low: 1st *ENG 016 Separation DC: Low: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 906 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1 – A /step] [SP 3: Size Correct: BW] DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 2861 SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values.
  • Page 907 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width) 002 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S2 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 908 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S2 *ENG 194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S3 *ENG 165 mm >...
  • Page 909 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [1 to 100 / 27 / 1 /step] 006 Paper Transfer: Low: 2: S3 *ENG 165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper width) [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step] 007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1: S4 *ENG 139 mm >...
  • Page 910 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [SP 3: T-Edge Correct] DFU Special 3 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values. 2873 Low: 85 mm/sec •...
  • Page 911 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx [Reverse Time] DFU 2902 Adjusts the time for how long the drum motor reverses after job end. 002 Drum All: FC *ENG 003 Dev All: FC *ENG [0 to 800 / 70 / 10 msec/step] 004 Dev All: Bk *ENG [Reverse Time] DFU...
  • Page 912 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [FC: ACS] DFU Adjusts the threshold for moving away the image transfer belt from the color PCUs. This SP moves the image transfer belt away from the color PCUs when the number of B/W image 2907 printouts reaches the number of sheets specified with this SP after consecutive full color image printouts in the full color mode.
  • Page 913 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP2-xxx 002 260 mm/sec *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: High speed 003 182 mm/sec *ENG 1: Low speed [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 005 85 mm/sec *ENG 0: High speed 1: Low speed 2920 [Transfer Motor Ctrl]...
  • Page 914 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 003 T5: Bk: Low *ENG 004 T7: FC: Low *ENG [-210 to 210 / 0 / 10 msec /step] 005 T5: Bk: Middle *ENG 006 T7: FC: Middle *ENG 2960 [Process Interval] DFU 001 Additional Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 1 / 1 sec/step]...

  • Page 915: System Sp3-Xxx

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx System SP3-xxx SP3-XXX (Process) 3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution] [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] Executes the normal process control manually 001 Normal (potential control). Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing this SP. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ] Executes the toner density adjustment manually.
  • Page 916 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result Displays the result of the latest process control self-check. All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order "Y C M K" 3012 e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successful.
  • Page 917 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ] Display: latest YMCK *ENG 1: Success 2 to 9: Failure Displays the developer initialization result. See the "Error Condition Tables" in the Process Control Error section for details on the meaning of each code. All colors are displayed.
  • Page 918 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 004 Lower Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01 V/step] 005 Thresh Num of Lower Counter *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1 times/step] 006 Upper Counter: Bk *ENG 007 Upper Counter: C *ENG 008 Upper Counter: M...
  • Page 919 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx [Toner Replenishment Mode] 3022 Sets the toner supply flag of each color. 005 Execution Flag: Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 006 Execution Flag: C *ENG 0: Flag OFF, 1: Flag ON This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor 007 Execution Flag: M *ENG...
  • Page 920 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: FIXED Pattern Caluculation *ENG Method 1: INITIALIZED 2: CALCULATED 3043 [TD Adjustment Mode] Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at power on.
  • Page 921 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at ACC. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.) 6 to 9: Disabled...
  • Page 922 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Consumption pattern: Y *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step] Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the yellow toner density when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment. T1 Bias: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 26 / 1 A/step]...
  • Page 923 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx Consumption Pattern: LD: DUTY: Y *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step] Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment. In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values (SP3611-004) exceed the target values (SP3611-008) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009).
  • Page 924 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 005 Toner Consumption: Bk *ENG 006 Toner Consumption: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step] 007 Toner Consumption: M *ENG 008 Toner Consumption: Y *ENG Displays the remaining amount of each color toner. These are calculated by the operating 009-012 times of the toner supply pumps.
  • Page 925 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 028-031 Displays the consumed toner amount calculated with the pixel count for each color. 028 Pixel: Consumption: Bk *ENG 029 Pixel: Consumption: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step] 030 Pixel: Consumption: M *ENG 031 Pixel: Consumption: Y *ENG...
  • Page 926 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Toner End Recovery] DFU 3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the TD sensor continues to detect toner end during toner recovery. 001 Repeat: Bk *ENG 002 Repeat: C *ENG...
  • Page 927 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 004 Med Speed Shift:Y *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.45 / 0.01 V/step] 005 Low Speed Shift:Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.84 / 0.01 V/step] 006 Low Speed Shift:C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.87 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Low Speed Shift:M *ENG 008 Low Speed Shift:Y...
  • Page 928 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 009 182 Current: Bk *ENG 010 182 Current: C *ENG 011 182 Current: M *ENG 012 182 Current: Y *ENG [2.45 to 5 / 3.5 / 0.01 V/step] 013 182 Initial: Bk *ENG 014 182 Initial: C *ENG...
  • Page 929 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 001 Lower: Bk *ENG 002 Lower: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Lower: M *ENG 004 Lower: Y *ENG 005 Upper: Bk *ENG 006 Upper: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Upper: M *ENG 008 Upper: Y...
  • Page 930 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Low Coverage Coeff. Bk *ENG 002 Low Coverage Coeff.C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.7 / 0.1 /step] 003 Low Coverage Coeff.M *ENG 004 Low Coverage Coeff. Y *ENG 005 High Coverage Coeff. Bk *ENG 006 High Coverage Coeff.
  • Page 931 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 006 ADD:MiddleSpd *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 007 ADD:LowSpd *ENG 009 N:Delay *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 /step] 030 PID:I:K *ENG 031 PID:I:C *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.4 / 0.01 /step] 032 PID:I:M *ENG 033 PID:I:Y...
  • Page 932 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 071 AWPUP: LowSpd *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 090 SMITH:K *ENG 091 SMITH:C *ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 092 SMITH:M *ENG 093 SMITH:Y *ENG 094 SMITH: MidSpd *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step]...
  • Page 933 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 131 ANCT:LowSpd *ENG [0 to 10 / 1.16 / 0.01 /step] 150 AWPNI:K *ENG 151 AWPNI:C *ENG [0 to 10 / 0.2 / 0.001 /step] 152 AWPNI:M *ENG 153 AWPNI:Y *ENG 154 PID *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 180 ANCLA:K *ENG [0 to 10 / 0.49 / 0.01 /step]...
  • Page 934 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 210 PIX:TBL:1 *ENG 211 PIX:TBL:2 *ENG 212 PIX:TBL:3 *ENG 213 PIX:TBL:4 *ENG 214 PIX:TBL:5 *ENG 215 PIX:TBL:6 *ENG 216 PIX:TBL:7 *ENG 217 PIX:TBL:8 *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 218 PIX:TBL:9 *ENG 219 PIX:TBL:10...
  • Page 935 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx [Toner Supply: Setting] DFU 3231 Adjusts the coefficient of the toner supply time for each color. 001 Conversion Coeff.:Bk *ENG [0.5 to 9.99 / 2.11 / 0.01 /step] 002 Conversion Coeff.:C *ENG [0.5 to 9.99 / 1.97 / 0.01 /step] 003 Conversion Coeff.:M *ENG [0.5 to 9.99 / 1.90 / 0.01 /step]...
  • Page 936 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 002 Correction Coeff.:2 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step] 003 Correction Coeff.:3 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 /step] 004 Correction Coeff.:4 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0.25 / 0.01 /step] 005 Correction Coeff.:5 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step]...
  • Page 937 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 001 Latest: Bk *ENG 002 Latest: C *ENG [0 to 40000 / 0 / 0.1 mg/step] 003 Latest: M *ENG 004 Latest: Y *ENG [Developer Mixing Setting] DFU 3237 Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color. 001 Mixing Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]...
  • Page 938 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 009 P Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [0 to 2 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step] 010 P Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 2 / 0.25 / 0.01 /step] 011 P Rank 3 Threshold *ENG [-2 to 0 / -0.25 / 0.01 /step] 012 P Rank 4 Threshold...
  • Page 939 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 005 Standard Speed: Offset: Bk *ENG 006 Standard Speed: Offset: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 7 / 1 /step] 007 Standard Speed: Offset: M *ENG 008 Standard Speed: Offset: Y *ENG 009 Middle Speed: Coef: Bk *ENG 010 Middle Speed: Coef: C *ENG...
  • Page 940 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 005 Middle Speed: Offset: Bk *ENG 006 Middle Speed: Offset: C *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 V/step] 007 Middle Speed: Offset: M *ENG 008 Middle Speed: Offset: Y *ENG 009 Low Speed: Coef: Bk *ENG 010 Low Speed: Coef: C...
  • Page 941 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction. 009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3251-018. 009 Average M: Bk *ENG 010 Average M: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]...
  • Page 942 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not. DevMix Theresh *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step] [ID Sensor Detection Value] 3311 Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments. 001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]...
  • Page 943 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG 002 Vsg reg: C *ENG 003 Vsg reg: M *ENG 004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG 005 Vsg dif: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step] 006 Vsg dif: M *ENG 007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG...
  • Page 944 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Vsg Adjustment Result] Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment. 3325 The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front, sensor for Bk, sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor for Yellow and sensor for Rear). 001 Latest *ENG 002 Latest 1...
  • Page 945 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 004 K5: Lower *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step] 005 Kn: Upper *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.05 / 0.01 /step] 006 Kn: Lower *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.7 / 0.01 /step] 007 K5 Edit Point *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.15 / 0.01 /step]...
  • Page 946 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Adjusts the processing timing for the pattern that is used for the line position adjustment. 004 MUSIC Delay Time *ENG [-2500 to 2500 / 300 / 1 msec/step] 3371 [M/A Calculation] DFU 001 Correction Coeff.: Bk *ENG 002 Correction Coeff.: C...
  • Page 947 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 3421 [Toner Supply Range] 001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG 002 Upper Limit: C *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during printing. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] 003 Upper Limit: M *ENG 004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG 005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG...
  • Page 948 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Process Control Target M/A] 3501 Adjusts the target M/A of the full coverage in single color printer mode. 001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.482 / 0.001 mg/cm /step] 002 Maximum M/A: C *ENG 003 Maximum M/A: M...
  • Page 949 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 006 Initial: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step] 007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step] 008 Charge AC Control Counter *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step] 019 Envir.Correction *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 950 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 003 Day *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1/step] 004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step] 005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / 0 / 1/step] [Environmental Displ: Job End] 3514 Displays the environmental conditions at the last job.
  • Page 951 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 005 Rotation Threshold *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0.1 / 1 m/step] 006 Pixel Coverage Sum: Bk *ENG 007 Pixel Coverage Sum: C *ENG 008 Pixel Coverage Sum: M *ENG 009 Pixel Coverage Sum: Y *ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm /step]...
  • Page 952 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 029 TnCnsmp: Internal Thresh *ENG 030 TnCnsmp: Counter:Bk *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 page/step] 031 TnCnsmp: Counter:FC *ENG 032 TnCnsmp: Internal Thresh 2 *ENG [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 page/step] [Blade Damage Prevention] Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt 3517...
  • Page 953 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx [Toner End Prohibition Setting] 3519 Enables or disables each adjustment at toner end. 001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner end 002 MUSIC *ENG condition) 1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner end 003 TC Adjustment...
  • Page 954 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Rapi Timer Setting] Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the time-out time to get the Rapi timer. [Non-use Time Process Control Setting] Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by. 3531 When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is...
  • Page 955 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 008 Y (Target Display) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.77 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] Displays the standard target development gamma for each color. 009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.37 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 010 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG...
  • Page 956 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Development DC Control:Display] Standard: 260 mm/sec, Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec 3621 Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color. 001 Standard Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Standard Speed:C *ENG...
  • Page 957 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 001 Standard Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Standard Speed:C *ENG 003 Standard Speed:M *ENG 004 Standard Speed:Y *ENG 005 Middle Speed:Bk *ENG 006 Middle Speed:C *ENG [0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step] 007 Middle Speed:M *ENG 008 Middle Speed:Y *ENG...
  • Page 958 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Standard Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Standard Speed:C *ENG 003 Standard Speed:M *ENG 004 Standard Speed:Y *ENG 005 Middle Speed:Bk *ENG 006 Middle Speed:C *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 %/step] 007 Middle Speed:M *ENG 008 Middle Speed:Y...
  • Page 959 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step] 008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step] 009 Serial Number 1 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step] 010 Serial Number 2 *ENG 011 Adjustment: Vt...
  • Page 960 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 015 Vcnt latest Result *ENG [0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step] 016 182 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] [HST Concentration Control: M] 3713...
  • Page 961 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step] 005 Sensitivity: ML *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step] 006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step]...
  • Page 962 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Not used 005 Pixel Count AF Near Full 2 *ENG [0 to 100000 / 0 / 1 sheet /step] 006 Print Page AF Replacement *ENG [0 to 100000 / 0 / 1 sheet /step] 007 Pixel Count AF Replacement *ENG [0 to 100000000 / 0 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 963 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP3-xxx 009 PCU: Bk *ENG 010 PCU: C *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 011 PCU: M *ENG 012 PCU: Y *ENG 013 ITB Unit *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON...

  • Page 964: System Sp4-Xxx

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables System SP4-xxx SP4-XXX (Scanner) [Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. 001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA [L-Edge Regist Adjustment] 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.
  • Page 965 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx 001 Lamp: OFF *ENG OFF or ON 002 Lamp: ON [Scan] 4014 Execute the scanner free fun with each mode. 001 HP Detection Enable Scanner free run with HP sensor check. 002 HP Detection Disable Scanner free run without HP sensor check.
  • Page 966 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Book: Sub Leading Edge 002 Book: Sub Trailing Edge 003 Book: Main Leading Edge 004 Book: Main Trailing Edge [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] 005 ADF: Sub Leading Edge 007 ADF: Main Leading Edge 008 ADF: Main Trailing Edge [IPU Test Pattern]...
  • Page 967 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx 4450 [Scan Image Path Selection] Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path. SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF Uses or does not use the shading image path.
  • Page 968 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Text:K *ENG 002 Text:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Text:M *ENG 004 Text:Y *ENG 005 Photo:K *ENG 006 Photo:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 007 Photo:M *ENG 008 Photo:Y...
  • Page 969 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx 001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B *ENG 005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B *ENG 009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B *ENG 013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B *ENG 017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B *ENG 021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B *ENG Specifies the printer vector correction 025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B *ENG value.
  • Page 970 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 4571 [Scan Appl.: Color: Glossy Photo] DFU 4572 [Scan Appl.: AutoColor] DFU 4580 [FAX Appl.: Text/Chart] DFU 4581 [FAX Appl.: Text] DFU 4582 [FAX Appl.: Text/Photo] DFU 4583 [FAX Appl.: Photo] DFU 4584 [FAX Appl.: Original 1] DFU 4585...
  • Page 971 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx 001 Book Read [-512 to 511 / -80 / 1 digit/step] 002 DF Read [-512 to 511 / -80 / 1 digit/step] 4610 [Gray Balance Set: G] 001 Book Read [-512 to 511 / -85 / 1 digit/step] 002 DF Read 4611 [Gray Balance Set: B]...
  • Page 972 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Black Level Adj. Display] 4625 BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing 001 Latest: BE Color speed).
  • Page 973 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx 001 Latest: GE Color [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: GO Color [Digital Gain Adj. Display] 4633 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Latest: BE Color [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: BO Color 4645...
  • Page 974 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the black offset value for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing Last Correct Value: GE *ENG speed). Color [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing Last Correct Value: GO...
  • Page 975 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx [Digital Gain Adj. Display] 4661 RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value: RE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Last Correct Value: RO Color *ENG [Digital Gain Adj.
  • Page 976 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD 002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG circuit board (color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Black Level Adj.
  • Page 977 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx 001 Latest: RE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Latest: RO Color *ENG [Digital Gain Adj. Display] 4681 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. 001 Latest: GE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]...
  • Page 978 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [White Level Peak Read] 4692 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning. 001 BE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 BO [Black Level Peak Read] 4693 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. 001 RE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 RO...
  • Page 979 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx 4806 [Carriage Move] Moves the carriage from the scanner home position. 001 - Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass. Therefore, do this SP when you transport the machine a long distance. 4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change] [0 to 250 / 0 / 1 /step] 1: Grid pattern 001 -...
  • Page 980 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 005 G DATA2 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit) 006 B DATA2 *ENG Photo Y Patch Level 17 (8-bit) [Select Gradation Level] DFU 4905 Changes the parameters for error diffusion. 001 - [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] [Manual Gamma Adj] 4918...
  • Page 981 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP4-xxx Selects the range level of Highlight correction. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 002 Range Selection *ENG 0: weakest skew correction, 9: strongest skew correction [Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.] 4994 Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF. [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] 0: Text priority 001 High Compression PDF...

  • Page 982: System Sp5-Xxx

    CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables System SP5-xxx SP5-XXX (Mode) [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 1: inch (USA) [Accounting Counter] Selects the counting method.
  • Page 983 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx [Coverage Counter Display] 5056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the operation panel. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display [Toner Remaining Icon Display Change] 5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
  • Page 984 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [PM Parts Display] 5066 Display or does not display the "PM parts" button on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: No display, 1: Display [Parts Replacement Operation Type] 5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.
  • Page 985 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx [Supply Part Replacement Operation Type] 5073 This SP makes it possible for users to replace the bottle. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 Waste Toner Bottle *CTL 0: Service, 1: User 5113 [Optional Counter Type] This program specifies the counter type.
  • Page 986 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to "paper feed" and "paper exit" respectively. 5127 [APS Mode] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled] 001 This program disables the APS. [Code Mode With Key/Card 5128 *CTL...
  • Page 987 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx [CE Login] 5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Disabled...
  • Page 988 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [0 or 1 / 1 / -] *CTL 0: Productivity priority 1: Tray priority Selects the paper feed mode. Productivity priority: This changes the feeding tray as soon as the machine detects the priority tray even the paper still remains in the feeding tray.
  • Page 989 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx [Set Time] Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone. Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.) DOM: +540 (Tokyo) NA: -300 (New York) 5302 EU: + 60 (Paris) CH: +480 (Peking) TW: +480 (Taipei)
  • Page 990 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Rule Set (Start) Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
  • Page 991 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx Default Document ACL *CTL Whenever a new login user is added to the address book in external certification mode (for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default document ACL is updated according to this SP setting. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1] 0: View 1: Edit 2: Edit/Delete...
  • Page 992 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Detail Option *CTL Enalbes or disables the log out confirmation option. • Bit 0: Log out confirmation option 0: Enable (default), 1: Disable Selects the automatic log out time. • Bit 1 and 2: Automatic log out timer reduction 00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10 seconds, 10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds 5404...
  • Page 993 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and password after an account lockout has occurred. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL 0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled) 1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are entered.
  • Page 994 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack detection 001 Access User Max Num *CTL functions. [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users] Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password attack detection 002 Access Password Max Num *CTL...
  • Page 995 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy applications. 001 Copy *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 /1] 0: On, 1: Off Color Security Setting *CTL Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the user authentication is "ON".
  • Page 996 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 051 SDK1 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF 061 SDK2 *CTL Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the SDK application. 071 SDK3 5430 Auth Dialog Message Change 001 Message Change On/Off *CTL...
  • Page 997 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx [Authentication Error Code] 5481 These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed. Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user authentication failure occurs. 001 System Log Disp *CTL [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: Off, 1: On Determines whether an error code appears on the...
  • Page 998 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included). [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 0: Zero (Off) 1: Low (2.5K jams) 2: Medium (3K jams) 3: High (6K jams) [Error Alarm] Sets the error alarm level.
  • Page 999 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA System SP5-xxx 128 Interval :Others 133 Interval :A4 134 Interval :A5 142 Interval :B5 [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] 164 Interval :LG 166 Interval :LT 172 Interval :HLT 5508* [CC Call] *CTL - Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable 001* Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
  • Page 1000 CÓPIA NÃO CONTROLADA 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 001 SC Call 0: Off, 1: On 002 Service Parts Near End Call [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: Off, 1: On 003 Service Parts End Call 004 User Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]...

This manual is also suitable for:

M024M026M028

Table of Contents